Home

2FG Cover(E) - Moro Informatica

1.
2.
3.
4. 2 4 20 General wiring diagram N o 10 eo N E HE z s E BS i Ir EZ TE 9 vH E Z a 2 se Oe r e sl eH z oe Es 5 Hi msa x E oo ae Maz SE uoz W T Si r e efs z AH Q Z a gt x E S Z c 8 560 HEN Em HE El rg Ack O200 ed ott 5 eee oa AS EE 818 reis ET IZ Ave z aa GNO sre 3 z ert Wad 440 MSW AS 4 IL c5 SLE lt S n z B i ala TMS E ssl E Ba EI peces o siga weji gig E ge ss z oe 2 S b ope l E cl ti Wad OL 9 zid arme Sly t 9H el r pui 5t Es z Lig ONS Ee EE SE ih B m A 018 AG E Z el r Se y ONS S 68 lt oT T I 3 amp g x MS iTe ES SE Wi n aof EES m az OL L gt e E oe PS i8 F c
5. J M 2 2 4 4 Other electrical components enne nnne nenne nnn nennen nnns nennen 2 2 5 2 3 Operation of the PCBs 223 1 Power source PCB tabe e NOEL e EE Le eee e e re OR De 2 3 1 2 3 2 Malt PGB S M 2 3 5 2 3 3 Operation unit PCB istics a nia Git Wace aa aan aca 2 3 17 2 3 4 Scanner drive EE 2 3 22 2 3 5 COD PGB Sasu UU AE de et ed ee 2 3 25 2 4 Appendixes Timing chart No Timing chart No Timing chart No Timing chart No Timing chart No Timing chart No Timing chart No Timing chart No Timing chart No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Timing char No 10 cesses n m ee eg 2 4 10 Timing chan Noi e ioni RR u a asas asi uu SSS EH 2 4 11 Chart of image adjustment procedures u 2 4 12 Maintenance oF Iaa E u Lu S eee Rem eim 2 4 15 Periodic maintenance Drocedures A 2 4 16 Optional devices supplied parts let 2 4 18 General wiririg diagrarm ss etie i uu u umaku g de S uQ Sau Sua d ge are pa deque 2 4 20 1 1 1 Specifications TVDe itive E E etic ees Copying system Originals Original feed system Copy paper Copying sizes Magnification ratios Copy speed First copy time Warm up time Paper feed system Continuous copying Pho
6. 1 6 11 3 3 Adjusting the center line of image Gring 1 6 12 3 4 Adjusting the margins for printing a 1 6 13 3 5 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper 1 6 14 Optical SECO y ete 1 6 15 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp u uu u 1 6 15 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner wires uuu 1 6 16 2 1 Detaching the scanner wies REENEN 1 6 16 2 2 Refitting the scanner wires cecinere entente enden iaiaeiaeiaa 1 6 17 3 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit sssseeeeeenenene 1 6 20 4 Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit reference esssesseessesresrrerrerieererreernsrrerresrsrent 1 6 22 5 Detaching and refitting the ISU reference a 1 6 23 6 Adjusting the position of the ISU reference u 1 6 25 7 Adjusting the longitudinal squareness reference u 1 6 26 8 Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction 1 6 27 9 Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction 1 6 28 10 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration u u u 1 6 29 11 Adjusting the scanner center line EEN 1 6 30 12 Adjusting the margins for scanning an
7. Machine front 777 Machine inside E Machine rear Figure 2 2 1 PCBs Main PCB MPGB u u u au sueis Controls the other PCBs electrical components and optional devices Generates 24 V DC 12 V DC and 5V DC controls the fixing heater IS Va Main charging Generates developing bias and high voltages for transfer Scanner drive PCB SDPCB Controls the scanning section Inverter PCB INPCB Controls the exposure lamp e CCD PCB CODPGB u uuu rne Reads the image off originals Right operation unit PCB OPCB R Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs Left operation unit PCB OPCB L Controls touch panel and LCD indication Laser diode PCB LDPCB Generates and controls the laser light Noise filter PCB NFPCB Reducts the noise 2 2 1 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 2 Switches and sensors OO Joo G N 10 11 12 13 14 Machine front LZ Machine inside L Machine rear Figure 2 2 2 Switches and sensors Power switch DW Turns the AC power on and off Interlock switch ILSW Turns the AC power for the fixing heater on and off Safety switch 1 SSW1 Breaks the safety circuit when the conveying unit is opened Safety switch 2 SSW2 Breaks the safety circuit when the fro
8. Separation electrode Transfer roller Figure 2 1 20 Transfer and separation sections Separation electrode SC C gt CN1 9 CN1 6 Transfer roller CN1 2 HVTPCB Figure 2 1 21 Transfer and separation sections block diagram 2 1 17 2FD 2FF 2FG Image ready Secondary paper Secondary paper feed end feed start rar 48 ms RCL 124 ms gt 80 ms EM HP T RSW ESW R TC REM 123 323 ms b SR J 52 ms ee 0 0UPpmo Timing chart 2 1 5 Transfer and separation sections operation 8 80 ms after the registration clutch RCL turns on to start secondary paper feed transfer charging TC REM starts Also separation bias SC REM turns on b 323 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch RSW off transfer charging TC REM ends c 52 ms after transfer charging TC REM ends separation bias SC REM turns off 2 1 18 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 1 6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer process and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner tank The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging Al
9. Controls feed clutch 3 drive timing Bypass feed switch BYPFSW Controls bypass feed clutch drive timing Scanner home position switch SHPSW Detects the optical system in the home position Original detection switch ODSW Operates the original size detection sensor Original size detection sensor OSDS Detects the size of the original Registration switch RSW Controls the secondary paper feed start timing Eject switchi ESW iiie Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section Feedshift switch FSSW Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy Toner sensor TNS Detects the toner density in the developing unit Toner container detection switch NK RE Detects the presence of the toner container Toner container sensor TCS Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container Toner disposal tank detection switch RRE Detects the presence of the toner disposal tank Overflow sensor OFS Detects when the toner disposal tank is full Humidity sensor HUMSENS Detects absolute humidity Fixing unit thermistor 1 FTH1 Detects the heat roller temperature Fixing unit thermistor 2 FTH2 Detects the heat roller temperature Front cover switc
10. 1 6 42 1 7 Requirements on PCB Replacement 2 1 7 1 Upgrading the firmware on the main DCH 1 7 1 1 7 2 Adjustment free variable resisters VR neret 1 7 2 1 7 3 Remarks on main PCB replacement enne en nennen 1 7 2 1 7 4 Upgrading the the printer board firmware L nennen 1 7 3 Mechanical construction 2 1 1 Paper feed section i ee Mini Q pe ec en eR u Pee ie iae 2 1 1 EEN Main CHANGING RE TEE 2 1 5 2 1 3 Optical Sectio Menia oct e eC e a al ahs edi te eed e 2 1 7 T Original seannirg 2 3 itr IRR E ER EUER Bait MH ER 2 1 8 2 Image Priming WEE 2 1 9 2 1 4 Developing SectiOni s eiui E IRE aqu FREMDE e E e aE etapa 2 1 12 1 Formation of magneti brush a u n L L Saa NRG aun m aR en nnne 2 1 13 2 Computing the absolute humiditly nnnm 2 1 14 3 Single component developing system 2 1 15 2 1 5 Transfer and separation sections 2 1 17 2 1 6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections 2 1 19 2 127 FIXING Section e ee m u m dec ua ui masapas th te a phaea pass 2 1 20 2 1 8 Eject and switchback sections 2 1 22 2 1 9 RI Ee WEE 2 1 24 1 Paper conveying operation in duplex Copvinmg 2 1 25 2 2 Electrical Parts Layout 2 2 1 Electrical parts Jaeger ege oT e e oa d e nd eee tdt deed eer eae sapaq 2 2 1 1 POBS iiid e tete tede Ds oe dde eee e leo de eec n PR bus 2 2 1 EAR Ee En EE 2 2 2 9 oo ccc
11. Figure 1 3 37 Size indicator LT A4 Size indicator 7 Align the pin holes in the left and right longitudinal size adjusters with the A4 pins or B5 pins according to the size of paper to be used Secure the adjusters using the screw for each Screw e B5 pins A4 pins Pin hole B5 A4 Pin hole 8 Connect the copier power plug to the wall outlet and turn the copier power switch on 9 Run maintenance item U208 and set the paper size for the large paper deck B5 A4 Letter 10 Load paper into the drawer and make a test copy to check the operation 1 3 20 Longitudinal size adjuster Longitudinal size adjuster Figure 1 3 38 2FD 2FF 2FG Adjusting the center line 1 Run maintenance item U993 Select PG1 and output a test pattern 2 Check if the center of the paper and that of See ut the test pattern output are aligned If not Ed P P perform the following adjustment qe pa J Center of the paper Figure 1 3 39 3 Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder and loosen the two screws securing the adjuster A and B test pattern output examples 4 If the test pattern output looks like A move A B the adjuster in the direction o
12. Tape K hi Tape Shifting guide Figure 1 3 156 6 Pull the rail unit out of the finisher 7 Loosely fasten the rail unit to the copier s finisher attachment area with the two M4 x 10 TP A bronze screws M4 x 10 TP A bronze screws Rail unit Figure 1 3 157 8 Move the finisher next to the copier and open the finisher s front cover Adjust the height adjustment screw in the rail unit until the guideline marked on the retainer is aligned with the center of the height adjustment plate Height adjustment Guideline Height adjustment plate Rail unit Figure 1 3 158 1 3 65 2FD 2FF 2FG 9 Pull the finisher away and tighten up the two M4 x 10 TP A bronze screws 10 Set the finisher against the copier 11 Open the finisher s front cover 12 Remove the tape securing the internal tray unit 13 Remove the fastening pin holding the internal tray unit in place and pull out the middle tray unit 1 3 66 Internal tray unit Front cover Figure 1 3 160 Fastening pin Internal tray unit Figure 1 3 161 14 Remove the tape securing the cushioning material for the stapler unit and remove the cushioning material 15 Remove the two fastening pins securing the stapler unit at the bottom of the intermediate tray unit 16 Raise the stapler unit in the indicated direction and load the two staple
13. Large paper desk Figure 1 3 29 3 Secure the copier to the large paper deck using the two pins 4 Refit the lower drawer to the copier gt ed Pin Large paper desk Figure 1 3 30 1 3 17 2FD 2FF 2FG 5 Remove the screw and then the cover from the rear of the large paper deck 6 Remove the screw from the rear of the copier Figure 1 3 31 7 Insert the 12 pin connector of the large paper deck into the connector on the copier 12 pin connector 8 Fit the retainer using the screw removed in step 6 and the two CVM4 x 06 cross head chromate binding screws 9 Refit the cover using the screw see step 5 1 3 18 Figure 1 3 32 Retainer CVM4 x 06 cross head chromate binding screw CVM4 x 06 cross head chromate binding screw J Figure 1 3 33 10 Turn the four leveling bolts until they reach the floor and adjust them to level the machine 11 Fit the stay to the lower left of the large paper deck toward the rear using the two M4 x 16 chrome TP screws such that it makes contact with the floor Note Do not fit the stay if the finisher is to be installed Setting the paper size 1 Open the large paper deck 2 Move the sliders at the machine front and rear inward two at each point 3 Remove the screw from eac
14. For output example 1 decrease the value using the cursor down key For output example 2 increase the value using the cursor up key Is the image correct Setting range initial setting LSU OUT 10 0 10 0 1 0 Press the stop clear key to exit LSU OUT DUP 5 0 5 0 0 maintenance mode Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0 1 mm 1 6 12 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 4 Adjusting the margins for printing Make the following adjustment if the margins are not correct U403 U404 Uo P 1 6 31 P 1 4 63 Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the margins are still incorrect perform the above adjustments in maintenance mode Y Enter maintenance mode Y Enter 402 using the numeric keys Procedure Y LEAD printer leading edge margin A printer left margin Press the start key C printer right margin TRAIL printer trailing edge margin Y TRAIL DUP printer trailing edge margin for Select the items to be adjusted duplex copying second face Y Press the interrupt key Press the start key The new setting is stored Y Press the start key to output a test pattern using A3 11 17 paper Y Change the setting Increasing the value using the cursor up Are the margins correct key makes the margin winder Decreasing the value using the cursor down key makes the margin narrower Setting range initi
15. 24V 24V 24V GND GND GND GND GND 5 1V OOOO G O O 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC supply 24 V DC supply 24 V DC supply 24 V DC supply Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 5 1 V DC supply Connected to the safty switch 1 safty switch 2 and main PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 24V GND GND GND 3 4V 3 4V 3 4V 5 1V 5 1V 24V Ol Oo OOOOO 3 4 V DC 3 4 V DC 3 4 V DC 5 1 V DC 5 1 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SSW1 Ground Ground Ground 3 4 V DC supply for MPCB 3 4 V DC supply for MPCB 3 4 V DC supply for MPCB 5 1 V DC supply for MPCB 5 1 V DC supply for MPCB 24 V DC supply for MPCB Connected to the main PCB HEATERON GND FH S FH M 5 1V ZCROSS 0to5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 1 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse Heater current monitor signal Ground FH S ON OFF FH M ON OFF 5 1 V DC supply from MPCB Zero cross signal Connected to the paper feeder large paper deck and mailbox switchback unit 5 1V GND GND 24V 24V 24V 5 1V GND GND GND 5 1 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 5 1 V DC 5 1 V DC supply Ground Ground 24 V DC supply 24 V DC supply 24 V DC supply 5 1 V DC supply Ground Ground Ground YC4 Connected to the cooling fan motor 4 Optional CFM4 REM 24V DC0V 24V 24 V DC CFM4 ON OFF 24 V DC supply for CFM4 2FD 2FF 2FG Connector Signal
16. a Figure 1 3 80 Connector YC46 Connector CN1 Scanner board LN Figure 1 3 81 LAN A T a AN ZT QE WA i S gt lt LY a Screws Figure 1 3 82 1 3 37 2FD 2FF 2FG SSS QU M99 o000 SSS 8990900000000 o 99990ooooooo 890900000000 889900000000 Printing system Screws cover fastening it into place with 2 screws If the printing system was installed 8 Reinstall the printing system into the shield Figure 1 3 83 9 Reattach the rear cover with 13 screws Rear cover Figure 1 3 84 1 3 38 1 3 11 Installing the built in finisher option Preparation Note When placing the transfer unit on the floor or the like be sure to place it upside down If not the stapler mounting plate may be deformed resulting in a malfunction Procedure 1 Remove the screw and the pin to remove the upper left cover 2 Open the conveying cover and the front cover 3 Loosen the two screws on the left side and the screw on the front side open the hook on the right side and remove the left front cover 2FD 2FF 2FG Transfer unit Upper left cover Figure 1 3 86 Left front cover Figure 1 3 87 1 3 39 2FD 2FF 2FG 4 Close the conveying cover and the front cover 5 Remove the two screws and then remove the ejection cove
17. Dirty main charger wire Clean the main charger wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it 7 A black line ap Causes pears laterally 1 Flawed drum 2 Dirty developing section 3 Leaking main charger housing 4 Leaking separation electrode Causes Check procedures corrective measures Flawed drum Replace the drum unit Dirty developing section Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing section Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire grid and shield Leaking separation electrode Clean the separation electrode 8 One side of the Causes copy image is 1 Dirty main charger wire darker than the 2 Defective exposure lamp other Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Dirty main charger wire Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it 2 Defective exposure lamp Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly If not replace the exposure lamp see page 1 6 25 1 5 41 2FD 2FF 2FG Deformed or worn cleaning blade 9 Black dots appear Causes on the image 1 Dirty or flawed drum 2 Dirty contact glass 3 4 Dirty drum separation claws 5 Causes Dirty heat roller separation claws Check procedures corrective measures Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit Dirty contact glass Clean the co
18. For copy example 1 increase the value using the cursor up key For copy example 2 decrease the value using the cursor down key Is the image correct Setting range 25 25 Initial setting 1 Press the stop clear key to Changing the value by 1 changes exit maintenance mode the magnification by 0 1 Increasing the value makes the image longer and decreasing it End make the image shorter 1 6 28 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 10 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Perform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original U034 U071 Ea nese P 1 4 26 Caution Before making the following adjustment ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode Procedure Scanner leading edge registration Enter maintenance mode Original Copy Copy Enter 066 using the numeric keys example 1 example 2 Figure 1 6 56 Press the start key ADJUST DATA Scanner leading edge registration SE be adjusted ADJUST DATA2 Scanner leading edge registration for rotate copying Press the interrupt key I Press the start key The new setting is stored Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy For copy example 1 increase No the value using the cursor up key For copy example 2 decrease the value using the c
19. be displayed normally Display Switches INTER LOCK SW Safety switch 1 and 2 SSW1 and 2 FRONT COVER Front cover switch FRCSW LEFT1 COVER Conveying cover switch CCSW LEFT2 COVER Side cover switch SCSW Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper Adjustment See page 1 6 14 1 4 21 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 22 Description Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors Purpose Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting MAIN MOTOR Drive motor speed adjustment 0 to 40 7 EJECT MOTOR Eject motor speed adjustment 0 to 14 7 POLYGON MOTOR Polygon motor speed adjustment 20 to 20 0 MAIN MOTOR EJECT MOTOR Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction and decreasing it makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction POLYGON MOTOR Increasing the setting makes the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and longe in the auxiliary scanni
20. laser beam is on Figure 2 1 12 2 1 11 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 1 4 Developing section The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed the doctor blade and the developing spirals that agitate the toner When the toner sensor TNS detects a low toner level in the developing unit the toner replenishment signal is output to the main PCB MPCB The main PCB MPCB that has received the signal turns on the toner replenishment solenoid TNFSOL and replenishes toner from the toner container to the developing unit Also the toner container sensor TCS checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container D Developing unit housing Developing roller 3 Toner sensor TNS 4 Doctor blade 5 Right developing spiral 6 Left developing spiral Developing roller Right developing spiral Developing paddle Flow of the toner Figure 2 1 14 Flow of the toner 2 1 12 1 Formation of magnetic brush 2FD 2FF 2FG The developing roller consists of a magnet roller with four poles and a sleeve roller Rotation of the sleeve roller around the magnet roller entrains toner which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller The height of the magnetic brush is reg
21. Bae S32 Ls iS INTIOO SES 2 e E r b ok QB IWSTWI I e aos va GND a 3 l xxo fds emS TNT HE INT ec 8 rasta L Te AMM ad LY i8 9 L F esse WHLAAN WW lt NINIBd i8 aN Ce eet mes ef mmu RER S Lhe SSOH2Z 5 eu GND zg sv ONS L 9 AUS gt AS Wad WT Z 2 sk HH i sj aly ONS SC lF ANSnN 1 e i s g EA SHA S NOLLdO ea AS fy ety ue TNT zH z ml te m m S Ele NO tg qqH Dame H s FL P z NO H3IV3H i KE va Ae va Cmn i S804 SMB ee AA S Aem SV HHHO 5 rs g Are NS S oy HS gy ziv zm HE z g B OND S o i 28 OS og Liv Ave OL H n8 z r AVE 59 9 D Z NOdQA IN OLV j MSOS v 6 d Te Su S NOJAV E 3 nna ZV lt sat Za 6v GND SIS ze 2495 ES 59 NOAVE As z 8 lt kOSHSA 8v AS SIS el 27 gg DUE AVS e E 8Y e inoar SV LV ems DR 2o B WON E OL a oe ana 88 e 9v ONS sls HO d pe 6v ect a a 88 lg oy ania 6 aen N E oe IE a ii 92 auo cts g fers ONS ey VA ory ONS on v AS ihe SE Ls 6t roue tIr8z5L tLE jy EE org ov lt ems zit cl fp lee S Yt QNO Joe d GND iy Iv ONS ZL are i 2 a rE Pere DIS IS oy c DU QNO jia ile aio nn Lj ot AF IH 85 Olle E EIER 8 4 ua OND ziy zs T g Ave SS i2 ro ay a NVIVOA Ee H5 ooo E 9 T _ I dxL301 8 EE oO CI E cie vl 9 ELO ZS J gt rz z EZ 8 QNO eg 3 Zzmk jev QNO gig ELS roo S OND El gx8 Ei DE jg 889 pre Z HaiMOdeH Me zL aNd oferty
22. Connected to the CCD PCB GND ODD GND EVEN 12V 5 1V GND CLP GND SHIFT GND CLK CLK RS RS O 00O Ei DC4 5V pulse DC4 5V pulse 12V DC 5 1 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse Ground CCDPCB ODD signal analog Ground CCDPCB EVEN signal analog 12 V DC supply for CCDPCB 5 1 V DC supply for CCDPCB Ground CCDPCB CLP signal Ground CCDPCB SHIFT signal Ground CCDPCB CLOCK signal CCDPCB CLOCK signal CCDPCB RS signal CCDPCB RS signal Connected to the built in finisher OO OOOO Qi OS x 24V DC 24V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC supply for built in finisher 24 V DC supply for built in finisher Ground Ground 5 V DC supply for built in finisher Ground Serial signal TXD Ground Serial signal RXD Ground Built in finisher connection signal RESET signal Connected to the job separator Optional OO O O G N LED REM O Oo 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 0 5 V DC JBESW ON OFF 5 V DC supply for JBESW Ground Ground Job separator connection signal Ground EPDSW ON OFF 5 V DC supply for EPDSW LED JOB on off 2 3 13 2FD 2FF 2FG Connector Signal Voltage Description YC36 Connected to the job separator 5V
23. Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace feed switch 1 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken feed switch 2 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 2 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken feed switch 3 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 3 if its actuator is broken 1 5 13 2FD 2FF 2FG Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 14 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in copier pa per feed section Jam code 21 Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken desk feed switch actuator Check visually and replace the desk feed switch if its actuator is broken Defective desk feed switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the desk main PCB check if CN2 7 on the desk main PCB remains low when the desk feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the desk feed switch Broken by
24. Feedshift guide assembly Figure 1 3 136 EM 2S Se G Screw Sv 4 Z LZ lt e Aq BOGE Sel Projection A JJ mu CP DES WELT E NN lt Lj Dy Ree 223 LES 1 LT 7755 Matera i SEED TA lt l Curl eliminator x Figure 1 3 137 Left cover SE a M4 x 10 binding screws Latch catch Osa Figure 1 3 138 2FD 2FF 2FG 7 Align the rail retainer with the groove of the guide rail and attach the rail retainer to the guide rail Make sure that the plate spring of the rail retainer fits into the groove and the edge of the guide rail fits between the pulleys on the reverse side of the rail retainer Guide rail Rail retainer 8 Orient the guide rail such that its pulley is positioned toward the copier Guide rail Figure 1 3 140 9 Secure the rail retainer to the copier using Rail retainer two M4 x 10 binding screws such that the l front and the rear gaps between the floor and i z s J 8 Co 8 the rail retainer are approximately 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm Rail retainer M4 x 10 Figure 1 3 141 1 3 59 2FD 2FF 2FG 10 Insert the rail fixing plate into the bottom of the finisher and join them by inserting two M4 x 6 binding screws loosely 4 Finisher Rail fixing S plate eae M4 x 6 binding screws Rail fixing plate Figure 1 3 142 11 Insert the guide rail into the rail fixing plate and secure it usin
25. epoui SOUEUe1uIEN uoldii5s q soJnpoooud zu wzsnfpe afpu jo yeya Lieu 2 4 12 2FD 2FF 2FG da eur woy N speuiBuo BulAdoo 104 pO ueu QD SssejB 1oe1uoo y uo peoejd 9 F L NIOHVING rorn juewysnipe jsn pe Buiuueos ulbsew jeuiBuo ue BulAdoo 404 pn L 9 L eyo sel NIDSHVN a eorn eDeui eyep ueos peulo eui Bunsn py p Dugem y Bunsn py da eui uo speuiBuo BulAdoo 104 pO x Quew en SsejB 1oe1uoo y uo peoejd 9 F L NIDHVWS r0rn u unsnfpe jsn pe Buiuueos u Bieuu jeuiBuo ue BulAdoo 404 pn L 9 L eyo sel NIDHVINS eorn eDeui eyep ueos peulo eui Bunsn py ebpe Duipee y Buysnfpy da eui woy speuiBuo BulAdoo 104 L 0n ueunsni D sse B 1opluoo y uo peoejd 9c v L ray 3903 aval Zon pe Buruueos uorneuisiDe jeui amp uo ue BulAdoo 404 990N ESCH eyo 1s L vivd Lsnrav 990N Buju Wes ueos EufDuO ebpe Buipe y Buysnipy gt da eui wo speuibuo BulAdoo 104 ZZ0N ED ssejB 1oe1uoo y uo peoejd Lcv t pepis L zzon jueusn pe jueuusnfpe Guiuueos jeuiBuo ue Bui doo 104 Z90N 0 9 L eyo 1s L viva isnrav Z90n afew eyep ueos peul uo y Buysnipy eui 191ueo eui Bunsn py dq 24 uuouj juawysnipe Guiuueos speuiBuo BulAdoo 104 0Z0N uonoeuip Buiuueos D
26. Change the paper Broken feed switch 3 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 3 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Check if paper feed clutch 1 and 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feed clutch 1 or 2 on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with pa per feed clutch 1 and 2 Check Check if the deck feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select the deck feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the deck feed clutch Check 5 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from paper feeder upper drawer Jam code 12 Optional 1 5 10 Paper in the paper feeder upper drawer is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pulley separation pulley or forwarding pulley of the paper feeder upper drawer are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 3 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 3 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 3 Run
27. Fixing unit heater M or S installed incorrectly Check and reinstall if necessary Broken fixing unit heater M or S wire Check for continuity If none replace the fixing unit heater M or S see page 1 6 38 Abnormally high fixing unit thermis tor temperature Fixing thermistor 1 detects temperature 250 C 482 F or higher Fixing thermistor 2 detects temperature 210 C 410 F or higher Shorted fixing unit thermistor 1 or 2 Measure the resistance If it is 0 Q replace the fixing unit thermistor 1 or 2 Broken fixing unit heater control cir cuit on the power source PCB Replace the power source PCB Abnormally low fixing unit thermis tor temperature When only fixing heater M is on fixing thermistor 2 detects temperature lower than 80 C 176 F during copying When fixing heater M and fixing heater S are on fixing thermistor 2 detects temperature lower than 80 C 176 F or fixing thermistor 1 detects temperature lower than 100 C 212 F during copying 1 5 30 Poor contact in the fixing unit thermistor con nector terminals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken fixing unit thermistor wire Measure the resistance If it is Q replace the fixing unit thermistor Fixing unit ther mistor installed incorrectly Check and reinstall if
28. Leveling bolts Figure 1 3 24 M4 x 10 chrome TP screws Stays Figure 1 3 25 ee Center of the paper Center of the a test pattern output Figure 1 3 26 1 3 15 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Open the drawer of the paper feeder and loosen the three screws securing the adjuster A and B test pattern output examples 4 If the test pattern output example looks like A move the adjuster in the direction of the white arrow gt and retighten the three screws If the test pattern output example looks like B move the adjuster in the direction of the black arrow s and retighten the three screws 5 Output the test pattern again 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 until the centers of the paper and the test pattern are aligned Drawer Screws lt E Adjuster el le is eet Ei E E s Figure 1 3 27 If necessary please fix the cassette cursor with the screws included in the machine box 1 3 16 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 6 Installing the large paper deck option Preparation 1 Remove the lower drawer from the copier 4 MU MU CUm Z Lower drawer Figure 1 3 28 2 Place the copier on top of the large paper deck with the positioning pins at the front left and right of the large paper deck aligned with the holes in the base of the copier
29. Voltage Description YC5 Connected to the fixing heater M and S FH M ON FH M ON FH S ON FH S ON FH LIVE FH LIVE OOOOOO 120 0 V AC 220 240 0 V AC 120 0 V AC 220 240 0 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC FH M ON OFF FH M ON OFF FH S ON OFF FH S ON OFF 120 V AC supply 220 240 V AC supply YC6 Connected to the scanner drive PCB DP and hard disk o Joo G N GND O0 OOO OOo 24 V DC DC5V 24 V DC 24 V DC DC5V DC5V 24 V DC DC5V Ground 24 V DC supply for SDPCB Ground 5 V DC supply for SDPCB 24 V DC supply for DP 24 V DC supply for DP Ground Ground 5 V DC supply for DP 5 V DC supply for DP Ground Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC supply for hard disk 5 V DC supply for hard disk Connected to the main PCB Optional 2 3 4 CFM4 POWDOWN 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC CFM4 remote signal SLEEP singal 2 3 2 Main PCB Operation unit CPU U26 Main CPU U8 Main PCB Operation unit Scan signal XO Detection signal input U42 Operation CPU FLASH U29 34 LCD controller U24 LCD display data Address bus 2 3 ZX Z2 Pew Fax transmission A D converter U17 18 SDRAM U25 MIP U21 E 5 E o a D s s lt Main CPU Backup FLASH FLASH U7 U9 2 2 m ae Main CPU SRAM U11 56 Detaction signal input reception data BUF pe Ana
30. 2FD 2FF 2FG The operation unit PCB OPCB consists of the operation unit left PCB OPCB L and the operation unit right PCB OPCB R The operation unit right PCB OPCB R consists of key switches and LEDs The lighting of LEDs is determined by scan signals SCAN5 to SCAN8 and LED lighting selection signals DIGLED7 to DIGLED8 from the main PCB MPCB The key switches operated are identified by the scan signals SCAN5 to SCAN8 and the return signals DIGKEY4 to DIGKEY9 As an example to light LED 1 L1 the LED lighting selection signal DIGLED7 should be driven low in synchronization with a low level on the scan signal SCANS LEDs can be lit dynamically by repeating such operations As another example if KEY 1 is pressed the corresponding key switch is turned on feeding the low level of the scan signal SCANS back to the main PCB MPCB via the return signal DIGKEY4 The main PCB MPCB locates the position where the line outputting the scan signal and the line inputting the return signal cross and thereby determines which key switch was operated The operation unit left PCB OPCB L consists of key switches and LEDs The lighting of LEDs is determined by scan signals SCAN1 to SCAN4 and LED lighting selection signals DIGLED1 to DIGLED6 from the main PCB MPCB The key switches operated are identified by the scan signals SCAN1 to SCAN4 and the return signals DIGKEY1 to DIGKEY3 As an example to light LED 7 L7 the LED l
31. Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U019 Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PCB Purpose To check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the last digit of the number Method Press the start key The last eight digits of the part number indicating the ROM version are displayed Display Description MAIN Main ROM IC MMI Operation ROM IC LANGUAGE Stand Standard language ROM IC LANGUAGE Option Optional language ROM IC MAIN BOOT Boot of main ROM IC MMI BOOT Boot of operation ROM IC PRINTER Boot of printer board ROM IC NETWORK SCANNER Network scanner ROM IC POWER SAVE Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Initializing all data Description Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings Purpose Used when replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key All data in the backup RAM is initialized and the original settings for Inch specifications are set When initialization is complete the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on and the display language to the initial setting of English Completion To exit this maint
32. The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 2983 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on Misfeed in fixing section paper feeder lower drawer The eject switch ESW does not turn on within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 2983 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on Misfeed in fixing section large paper deck The eject switch ESW does not turn on within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 2983 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on Misfeed in fixing section duplex section The eject switch ESW does not turn on within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 2983 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on Eject sec tion Misfeed in eject section The eject switch ESW does not turn off within 2898 ms of the registration switch RSW turning off The eject switch ESW does not turn off within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on Misfeed in job separator eject section The job separator eject switch JBESW does not turn on within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on The job separator eject switch JBESW does not turn off within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch FSSW turning off The job separator ej
33. 1 3 NOOO Enter the maintenance mode and run U246 2 Select Saddle finisher and press the start key Select the size to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse Change the setting using the cursor up down keys a Decrease the preset value b Increase the preset value Setting range 125 to 125 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step Approx 0 25 mm Press the start key The value is set Press the stop clear key twice Run U001 to exit the maintenance mode OK 1 3 32 a Signal cable of the finisher Signal cable of t the switchback unit P Figure 1 3 68 ZA Z NG Figure 1 3 69 1 3 8 Installing the sheet through document processor option Preparation 1 2 3 Insert the DP into the copier Connect the connector of the DP to the copier Insert the copier power plug to the wall outlet and turn the power switch on Place the original on the DP and make a test copy Check the operation and the copy image If the copy image is different from the original run the following adjustment e Maintenance item U070 sub scan line adjustment see page 1 4 25 e Maintenance item U071 leading edge timing adjustment see page 1 4 26 e Maintenance item U072 center line adjustment see page 1 4 27 DP SET s 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 9 TIET Figure 1 3 70 Connector Figure 1
34. 2 1 1 2FD 2FF 2FG The bypass table can be hold up to 200 sheets of paper at one time Paper is fed from the bypass table by the rotation of the bypass forwarding pulley and bypass paper feed pulley Also during paper feed the bypass separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque limiter L e Ce O d ee oe j 3 Figure 2 1 2 Paper feed from the bypass table D Bypass table 2 Bypass lift guide 3 Bypass forwarding pulley 4 Bypass paper feed pulley 5 Bypass separation pulley 6 Bypass feed roller 1 Bypass feed pulley Bypass feed roller 2 9 Bypass feed pulley Bypass paper switch BYPPSW Q Bypass feed switch BYPFSW Bypass paper length switch BYPPLSW 43 Bypass paper width switch BYPPWSW 2FD 2FF 2FG MPCB O o YC16 B6 vA Fi RSW YC10 A2 O res YC11 14 J PSW U LICSW U YC13 B9 YC13 B12 YC16 B1 as YC13 A12 m Fsw2 PSW L LICSW L YC13 B15 YC13 B18 YC16 B4 O Fa YC13 A5 FSW3 YC13 A2 i YC13 A7 Figure 2 1 3 Paper feed section block diagram upper and lower drawers OQ Oo Er ew lt co o gt Figure 2 1 4 Paper feed section block diagram bypass table 2 1 3 2FD 2
35. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 56 Setting the display order of the date Description Selects year month and day as the order of that appears on lists etc Purpose Set according to the user preference Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the desired order Display Setting YEAR MONTH DATE Year Month Day MONTH DATE YEAR Month Day Year DATE MONTH YEAR Day Month Year Initial setting MONTH DATE YEAR for the inch specifications DATE MONTH YEAR for the metric specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U265 Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PCB and the like Method Press the start key Setting 1 Use the numeric keys or cursor up down keys to adjust the preset value 2 Press the start key The count is set and the screen for selecting a mai
36. key 4 Enter the password and press the Close key 5 Press the Close key 6 Press the End key 1 4 8 Deletes the data in the synergy print box 1 Press the Box editting key Select the desired box Press the Reset Box key Press the Yes key Press the Close key Press the End key OO WP Duration to save document data setting Sets the duration to save the document data in the synergy print box 1 Press the Document save term Document saving key 2 Press the keys to set the duration Setting range 1 to 7 days To save documents with no specific duration press the No time limit key 3 Press the Close key 10 Hard disk management This setting is available when the optional hard disk is installed in the copier Checks available space and or deletes any invalid data on the optional hard disk 1 Press the On key under Check HDD capacity The overall size of the hard disk and the currently available space will displayed 2 Press the On key under Delete invalid data The operation to delete invalid data will start 11 Status report print out Prints out one of the status report 1 Press the key of the report to print out Copy report Machine report Toner coverage report The selected status report will be printed out 12 Language selection function Switches the language
37. 0 to 10 0 2 5 0 1 mm C MARGIN Right margin 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm D MARGIN Trailing edge margin 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 1 mm Increasing the setting males the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower DP leading edge margin 3 1 5 mm Ejection direction reference DP left margin DP right margin 2 1 0 mm l 2 1 0 mm DP trailing edge margin 2 1 0 mm Figure 1 4 7 Correct margin amount 3 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Adjustment See page 1 6 11 1 4 63 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U504 Initializing the scanner NIC Description Initializing the optional scanner NIC to its factory default Purpose To return to a setup at the time of factory shipments Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key All data in the scanner NIC is initialized Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Settin
38. 108 Malaysia 253 CTR21 European nations Denmark 126 New Zealand Italy Finland 136 Peru Germany Portugal 137 Philippines Spain Ireland 152 Middle East U K Norway 156 Singapore Netherlands 254 Taiwan 4 Enter the OEM code 000 and then press the start key 5 Confirm that the display is changed as shown in the illustration At the position of the version number of the software is displayed 6 Press the cursor key to change the display to maintenance item U602 7 Press the start key and confirm that the display is changed as shown in the illustration At the position of the version number of the software is displayed 8 After completing the installation run a communications test to confirm that the fax system is working correctly INI KEEP DATA COMPLETED XXX 000 INI KEEP DATA COMPLETED V in SELECT THE MAINTENANCE NUMBER Initial keep data U601 Figure 1 3 130 INI SHIP DATA COMPLETED XXX 000 INI SHIP DATA COMPLETED V i SELECT THE MAINTENANCE NUMBER Initial ship data U602 Figure 1 3 131 1 3 55 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 14 Installing the hard disk option Al e Procedure Cover for e the rear cover 9 1 Remove the screw and remove the cover for the rear cover 2 Attach the core to the wire of the hard disk by winding it one turn around the core Attach the core to the 4 pin wire of the machine
39. 2 Precautions for Maintenance AAWARNING e Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related je frei alil p PER TEE Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits sssssssssessseseeeneneeeeeeenen nennen nennen nnne nnn Always use parts having the correct specifications U e Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related Q brochure when replacing them Using a piece of wire for example could lead to fire or other le Eeer Le EE When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a o part always use the correct scale and measure carefully sessssssssssseeeeeern e Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock 1 Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers Leaking laser light may CAIMAGS CYSSIOMIN u E A Handle the charger sections with care They are charged to high potentia
40. Clearing the developing count U158 Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection Completion Press the stop clear key after initial setting is complete The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting toner loading operation Description Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying Purpose To set whether or not toner is loaded on the dium after low density copying Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description MODEO Toner not loaded MODE1 Toner loaded after simplex or duplex copying MODE2 Toner loaded after simplex copying Initial setting MODE2 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Checking sensors and switches for toner Description Displays the on off status of each sensor or switch related to toner Purpose To check if the sensors and switches operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key A list of the switches the on off status of which can be checked are displayed 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When the on status of a switch is detected that switch is displayed in reverse Display Switc
41. FH S Fixing unit thermostat FTS 8 Fixing unit thermistor 1 FTH1 9 Fixing unit thermistor 2 FTH2 Press roller 1 Press roller separation claw bb 9 e Figure 2 1 24 Fixing section Heat roller FH S REM YC10 A6 YC10 A5 YC10 A10 YC10 A9 Figure 2 1 25 Fixing section block diagram 2 1 20 2FD 2FF 2FG Fixing temperature 165 C 329 F secondary stabilization Fixing temperature 110 C 230 F primary stabilization Copying enabled Aging end MSW d 500 ms d FH M FH S ie ms H9S a eS 100 ms DB REM 900 ms ER CFM for second speed i Half speed ek Full speed 15s Half speed GC Full d for first speed lt ull spee PM 10s TC REM Timing chart 2 1 6 Fixing section operation 8 500 ms after the main switch MSW is turned on fixing heater M FH M turns on to heat the heat roller At the same time cooling fan motor CFM turns on The fan motor for second speed rotates at half speed and the motor for first speed rotates at full speed b 500 ms after fixing heater M FH M turns on fixing heater S FH S turns on 9 1 s after fixing heater M EH MI turns on the polygon motor PM of the laser scanner unit turns on When the fixing temperature reaches 110 C 230 F
42. Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine left 3 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for adjustment The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Adjusting the scanner magnification Adjustment See pages 1 6 27 and 28 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjustment See page 1 6 29 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjustment See page 1 6 30 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP Purpose Used when there is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is used Method Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Scanning position 32 to 32 5 0 17 mm Increasing the setting moves the image backward and decreasing it moves the image forward 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is di
43. OO Joo G N k o OFM RET OFM CLK OFM CWB OCM ENABLE OCM RET OCM CLK OCM CWB OCM VREF OCM M3 OCM M2 OCM M1 OOOOOOOOOOO OO 000 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC OFM RET signal OFM CLOCK signal OFM CWB signal OCM ENABLE signal OCM RET signal OCM CLOCK signal OCM CWB signal OCM current control voltage Vref OCM drive control signal M3 OCM drive control signal M2 OCM drive control signal M1 Connector Pin No Signal Voltage 2FD 2FF 2FG Description YC33 Connected to the DP OFM ENABLE OSBSW OFSW SET SW RESERVE SW RESERVE SW DP SHORT OSWSW DFSSW2 DFSSW1 OSLSW DFTSW OSLED RED OSLED GN SBPSOL RET SBPSOL ACT OFCL EFSSOL RESERVE SOL SBFSSOL OFSOL RET FOFSOL ACT OFM ENABLE OOOOOOOOOO0O0 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC OFM ENABLE signal OSBSW ON OFF OFSW ON OFF OSSW ON OFF DP connection signal OSWSW ON OFF DFSSW2 ON OFF DFSSW1 ON OFF OSLSW ON OFF DFTSW ON OFF OSLED red on off OSLED green on off SBPSOL release signal SBPSOL actuate signal OFCL ON OFF EFSSOL ON OFF SBFSSOL ON OFF OFSOL release signal OFSOL actuate signal OFM ENABLE signal
44. Paper ereas es Lu cbewsehdeesses 1 5 43 T4 e Ee 1 5 43 15 Image is partly missing recreare etre cete ee retro yiii seize yasa ea vere 1 5 44 16 FIXING WEE TE 1 5 44 17 Image iS OUt of fOCUS EENS NEESS 1 5 44 18 Image center does not align with the original center 1 5 45 19 Image iS MOU SQU ANC E 1 5 45 Electrical e geen EE 1 5 46 1 The machine does not operate when the power switch is turned on 1 5 46 2 The drive motor does not operate C2000 sss 1 5 46 3 The paper feed motor does not operate C2500 u 1 5 46 4 The eject motor does not operate treten eret rere teer bn pesi re n 1 5 46 5 The upper lift motor does not operate 10101 1 5 47 6 The lower lift motor does not operate C1020 a 1 5 47 7 The scanner motor does not operate REENEN 1 5 47 8 Cooling fan motor 1 does not opefat sicoiir e aiias oi E rN E EE 1 5 47 9 Cooling fan motor 2 does not operate a rannen nenne ennnen 1 5 47 10 Cooling fan motor 3 does not operate uuu u pence e p oa ioaea nnns 1 5 47 11 Cooling fan motor 4 does not operate u 1 5 47 12 Cooling fan motor 5 does not operate un 1 5 48 13 Cooling fan motor 6 does not operate sssssssssseee eene nennen nennen nnne nenne 1 5 48 14 Cooling fan motor 7 d
45. Perform the drum refresh operation 3 The transfer voltage is not output properly Clean or check the transfer roller 4 Dirty main charger Clean the main charger or if it is extremely dirty replace it 4 Background is visible Causes 1 Deteriorated toner 2 Dirty main charger Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Deteriorated toner Perform the drum refresh operation 2 Dirty main charger wire Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it b A white line appears Causes longitudinally 1 Foreign matter in the developing unit 2 Dirty shading plate Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Foreign matter in the developing unit Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly Replace the developing unit if any foreign matter 2 Dirty shading plate Clean the shading plate 1 5 40 2FD 2FF 2FG 6 A black line appears Causes longitudinally Dirty contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Deformed or worn cleaning blade Dirty scanner mirror Dirty main charger wire Gis GON Causes Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the cleaning blade 4 Dirty scanner mirror Clean the scanner mirror
46. UI Sui 60 SW ECE SU 08 Su ECE sw oor Y i sw 8 UIN Apeas abew J041u02 Ayisuap doo jenuew 00p one4 uoneoniuDeui aMeip J9M0 Jeidoo ay Wo jeded doo EX LL EW JO S199us OM oluo JeUIBIIO 2 8x 2 G HSy ue jo BuiAdoo snonunuo U ON Heyo Buluur L SW QOL ra Dal OL ZOA LV ELOA ZL LLOA LLW 9LOA eV OLOA tta LLa QLOA v LOA VE 9LOA ZLV ELOA FULL 98 9 LOA ZL OL LLOA LL 6 L LOA Wad 8d WAY OL BE LMSA MSA MSH na Wad ON T 103d e104 L 194 104 Wad WO Aen ueis 2 4 7 2FD 2FF 2FG SU Eet SW Cer L e peeds mo ye sui og li peeds uiu 18 su os peeds mo 1e uone pM OIJe10J 8H uoneior pw su a D 001 SW pe SU 08 Sul pc L sw 08 i sw gZ UIN Su g UN auer sul gy SUI 00 pe 1 oew pe 1 oew J041u02 Ayisuap doo ojne 9590 one1 uone Heu u jt b LOA 01 29A SV 910A ZI LLOA LEV 919A CND tta L8 910A v LOA 28 019A L8 9 19A FLA 99g 9L9A ZL OL LLOA LL 6 LEOA Waq OC IN3H OL TY8 0L9A MSOddNd MSSd LMS3 MS3 MSH WA Wad OW 104dNd N 104d 194 OH Wad wa Kex ueis Sameip 1eddn saidoo eui wos Adod 2 8x LL p V Xejdnp
47. four times continuously Broken gears of couplings of the desk lower lift mo tor Replace the desk lower lift motor Defective desk lower lift motor Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the desk lower lift motor Poor contact of the desk lower lift motor connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Defective desk lower lift limit switch Check if CN1 7 on the desk main PCB goes low when the desk lower lift limit switch is turned off If not replace the desk lower lift limit switch Poor contact of the desk lower lift limit switch con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable 1 5 26 Paper deck motor 1 problem A motor over current signal is de tected continuously for 1 s or longer Paper deck motor 1 does not rotate correctly the mo tor is overloaded Check the gears and remedy if necessary Paper deck motor 1 connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Optional Contents 2FD 2FF 2FG Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper deck motor 2 problem A motor over current signal is de tected continuously f
48. ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper ue TEE ACAUTION S Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface the copier may tip over causing injury Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock S Do not install the copier near a radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This may case file i atr det cee sew ee ve anadai ru needa os Ae nuu ed ve a ER Rao iaaa Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it Always use anti toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple leading to injury eese SOO Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively Protect the eyes If toner or developer is accidentally ingested drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately If it gets into the eyes rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain Q Uer re DEET Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier s Q instruction Ba E le eet
49. installed Purpose To be set as required according to the rumber of copies the user males Method Press the start key The current setting is displayed Setting 1 Set the number of sheets o to 250 using the numeric keys or cursor up down keys 2 Press the start key The setting is set The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the paper ejection Description Sets whether the copies will be ejected in the same or opposite order as the originals Purpose Set according to the preference of the user Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the ejection order Display Setting FACE DOWN NOMAL Face down ejection FACE UP SPEED Face up ejection with bitmap copy FACE UP MEMORY Face up ejection with memory copy Initial setting FACE DOWN To the auxiliary tray of the 3000 sheet finisher To the booklet stitcher To the 1000 sheet finisher 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed 1 4 59 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No U332 Setting the siz
50. paper Paper is fed from the drawer by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time via the torque limiter Figure 2 1 1 Paper feed from the upper and lower drawers D Upper forwarding pulley Lower forwarding pulley 3 Upper paper feed pulley LO Lower paper feed pulley 5 Upper separation pulley 6 Lower separation pulley Upper paper switch PPSW U Lower paper switch PPSW L 9 Upper lift limit switch LICSW U Lower lift limit switch LICSW L 4D Upper paper width switch PWSW U Lower paper width switch PWSW L 3 Upper paper length switch PLSW U 4 Lower paper length switch PLSW L 5 Drawer lift Right registration roller 2 Left registration roller Registration switch RSW Feed roller 1 0 Feed pulley Feed switch 1 FSW1 2 Feed roller 2 3 Feed pulley G Feed switch 2 FSW2 5 Feed roller 3 G Feed pulley Feed switch 3 FSW3 Front registration guide 9 Paper conveying guide GO Vertical paper conveying guide 1 6 Vertical paper conveying guide 2
51. pressing the corresponding Keys key and then using the numeric keys Setting range Inch specifications Width 3 7 8 11 5 8 Length 5 7 8 17 Metric specifications Width 98 297 mm Length 148 432 mm Press the Select paper type key Press the key that corresponds to the type of paper to be used Selecting other standard sizes Sets a special standard size 1 2 3 4 Press the Others Standard key Press the Select size key Press the key that corresponds to the size of paper to use and then press the Close key Press the Select paper type key Press the key that corresponds to the type of paper to use and then press the Close key 6 Original size registration Sets a custom original size that can be used under the Original size selection procedure 1 2 Press the Register orig size key Select of the Original size custom 1 to Original size custom 4 settings and then press the Change key Press the keys to change each of the displayed sizes Y width and X length to the desired settings Setting range Inch specifications Width 2 11 5 8 Length 2 17 Metric specifications Width 50 297 mm Length 50 432 mm 1 4 7 2FD 2FF 2FG 7 User adjustment Box data deletion Drum refresh This operation should be performed when the copy image becomes blurred or if white
52. sse B joe uoo y uo peoejd Sc v L viva isnrav ozon Aene y ur jeuueos eui jeui amp uo ue BulAdoo 404 s90n ESCH eyo se ray NYOS ans seon peeds Duiuueos euibuo E jo uo De Dunsnfpy jueuusn pe Buiuueos uogoeupp Buruueos D dq eui Buisn urew eui ui jeuueos eui BuI doo 10 jueugsn pe oN ESCH UEL sal ray NYOS NIVW S90N Duisseooid ejeq jo uogeoyiuBeui Buysnipy Ss juawysnipe But juawysnipe Buiuueos sseu GZ 9 yeu ise UUBDS NSI au JO uonisod y Bunsnfpy asenbs jesaye ay Bunsn py CTI a wawu usayyed 9 jsnfpe Bunuud suibsew 1 9 L 1881 z0rn v zon Dun pu uels uoneuruni NST 1u8u pue ye eui Buysnipy Spuet oDeg jeuibuo poNW ON w epoui eoueuajure y uonduoseq eeu we 2 4 13 2FD 2FF 2FG dd 84 WO4 speuiBuo BulAdoo 104 0rn ssejB Eu ay uo peoejd jeuiBuo ue BulAdoo 104 enn Sy1eUulaH Seat JO ww Q70 Buikdoo xejdnq ss 10 WW Q OL Ssed g ss JO WW OCT JM Burying ss 10 ww Q BulAdoo xajdnq SS9 JO WW O ZF ssed g SS9 JO WW Q Z JeMeJq Bunjus oew e19 8 1 ssa 10 ww Q z Bur doo xejdnq Seat JO ww ssed g Seat JO WWW Gg 4eweJq eoueueyip 1u6u Jel pee aded pemeys ww est Bui doo xejdnq ww ect ssed g WW G Z JeweJ uoneasiDe4 eDpe Buipee Uu g z T0S ww Q z os WW GZ F0 G ww Qz FOS epow 1ejuud sue ww amp 0 ww giog ww g z 0 uu
53. using the numeric keys 5 Select Name to display and then press the Change key 6 Enter the name for that department and then press the End key 7 Set the restrictions for using the copier under that department ID code and then press the Registr key Checks the total number of copies made under each individual department ID code and or clears the copy counts for individual departments as well 1 Press the Each Mot Total key 2 Select the department ID code to check the copy counts and then press the Total key The total number of copies made under that department ID code will be displayed 3 Press the Counter clear key to clear all of the copy counts for that ID code 4 Press the Yes key Turning the copy management function ON OFF 1 Select On or Off key Copier function management ON OFF Delete department ID codes Press the Management edit key 2 Select the department ID code to delete and then press the Delete key 3 Verify that this is the ID code to delete and press the Yes key 1 Press the Management Def Set key 2 Select Copy management and then press the Change key 3 Press the On key Printer function management ON OFF Change registered information i Press the Management edit key 2 Select the department ID code to change the registered i
54. 0 Initial setting Section Maintenance item contents Setting the exposure density gradient Text and photo text photo text in fax mode photo in fax mode 0 0 0 2 3 Initializing original size High voltage Checking the operation of main high voltage Setting high voltages Developing bias AC component frequency at image brmation Developing bias AC component duty at image brmation Developing shift bias potential at image formation Transfer control voltage Displaying the drum type Checking clearing the drum count Setting toner refresh operation Time of toner refreshment 120 Developing bias on time 700 30 cpm 540 40 50 cpm Performing the drum refreshment Setting separation charger mode Specifying SC Whole mode to ON OFF e Specifying the temperature humidity of which SC Whole mode in ON Specifying SC Whole mode to ON OFF when using thin paper Specifying SC Whole mode to ON OFF when using plain paper Checking the drum number Displaying the drum history Developing Initial setting for the developer Setting toner loading operation Checking sensors and switches for toner Checking clearing the developing drive time Checking the developing count Fixing and Setting the fixing control temperature cleaning Control temperature during copying 130 Primary stabilization fixing temperature 115 30 cpm 120 40 50 cpm Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 130 30 cpm 145 40 50 cpm Ti
55. 1 3 48 4 Move the film out of the way to the left and fasten the fax board into place using four M3 x 06 chrome binding screws 5 Connect the NCU cable to connector CN1 on the NCU board assembly 6 Fasten the NCU board assembly into place from the bottom with two M3 x 06 chrome binding screws Connect the three connectors from the NCU board assembly to the corresponding connectors on the fax board as follows Speaker 2 pin connector YC7 NCU board connector YC3 Battery connector YC6 N 2FD 2FF 2FG M3 x 06 chrome binding screws Fax board a0 7 E Figure 1 3 112 NCU cable NCU board assembly Figure 1 3 113 NCU board NCU board assembly connector amp M e 06 chrome Speaker 2 pin binding screws connector Battery connector Figure 1 3 114 1 3 49 2FD 2FF 2FG 8 Remove the film that fixes the three positive connectors of the power source PCB from the optional interface mounting plate Important Dispose of the film that has been removed 9 Connect the FAX PCB Power cable to connector CN1 on the auxiliary power source PCB assembly 10 Connect the three positive connectors on the power board to the corresponding connectors on the auxiliary power source PCB assembly as follows White positive connector TB1 white Green positive connector TB2 green Small white positive connector TB3 1 3 50 Optio
56. 1 4 48 Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U245 Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel Purpose To check the messages to be displayed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be displayed 3 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys to display each message one at a time When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed the message corresponding the specified number is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the finisher Description Adjusts various items if the machine is equipped with an optional finisher 3000 sheet finisher Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper in punch mode Booklet stitcher Adjusts the booklet stapling position for each paper size Built in finisher Adjusts the side registration cursor stop position in the staple sort mode Purpose Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper while in the punch section if in punch mode paper jams or is Z folded frequently due to too much slack in the paper or the position of punch holes varies due to too little slack in the paper Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper To adjust when registration is not proper or staple position is shifted in the staple sort mode Start 1 Press the start ke
57. 1 4 69 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U920 Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts Purpose To check the copy counts Method Press the start key The current counts of copy counter printer counter and fax counter are displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the system error counts Description Displays and clears the count value of system error Purpose To check the system error status by types Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts Method Press the start key The count for system error detection by type is displayed Clearing 1 Change the screen using the or keys 2 Select the counts for all system error and press the reset key 3 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance No item is displayed 1 4 70 Rewriting FAX program Description Downloads the fax program and fax fonts when installing an optional fax kit Purpose To run when upgrading the fax program and fax fonts Setting 1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug 2 Remove the middle right cover 3 Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the copier 4 While pressing the Copier key turn on the power switch and connect the
58. 2FG Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Drum unit connector insertion prob lem Absence of the drum unit is detected Drum unit connec tor inserted incor rectly Reinsert the drum unit connector if neces sary Defective drum unit connector Replace the drum unit Image formation unit fuse cut problem The input voltage is above 4 5 V Image formation unit connector in serted incorrectly Reinsert the image formation unit connec tor if necessary Defective image formation unit connector Replace the image formation unit Broken external temperature ther mistor wire The input voltage is above 4 5 V Poor contact in the humidity sen sor PCB connec tor terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective external temperature ther mistor Replace the humidity sensor PCB Short circuited external temperature thermistor The input voltage is below 1 0 V Poor contact in the humidity sen sor PCB connec tor terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective external temperature ther mistor Replace the humidity sensor PCB 1 5 32 Finisher paper conveying motor problem 3000 sheet finisher The paper conveying motor lockup s
59. 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No Description Left stapling Right stapling Adjustment method Proper Increase the preset value Z A Upper side is longer Lower side is longer Decrease the preset Ee value Lower side is longer Upper side is longer 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear ley Setting the side registration cursor stop position 1 Select the desired cursor position The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting FRONT Front side registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 REAR Rear side registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 END Trailing edge registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear ley Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed 1 4 50 Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description Checking the operation of large paper deck and paper feeder Description Turns on motors and clutches of optional large paper de amp or paper feeder Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper Bed device Start 1 Press the start key The screen f
60. 32 F for 30 s continuously when the fixing heater is on Poor contact in the fixing unit thermistor con nector terminals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken fixing unit thermistor wire Measure the resistance If it is Q replace the fixing unit thermistor Toner sensor problem While the toner container sensor is on the toner sensor in the developing unit does not turn on after the toner sensor turns off and toner is replen ished from the toner container This code is not displayed The service call counter counts the frequency of occurrence only as for this code Defective toner sensor Replace the toner sensor Poor contact in the toner sensor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective toner container sensor Replace the toner container sensor Defective toner container Replace the toner container Optional Image formation unit connector in sertion problem Absence of the image formation unit is detected Image formation unit connector in serted incorrectly Reinsert the image formation unit connec tor if necessary Defective image formation unit connector Replace the image formation unit 1 5 31 2FD 2FF
61. 40 50 Maintenance cycle Replace Clean when user call occurs Points and cautions Developing section Section Developing unit Maintenance part location Replace Method 400K 30 500K 40 50 Maintenance cycle Replace Check and replace when user call occurs Points and cautions Main charging drum section Section Drum unit Main charger unit Maintenance part location Replace Clean Method 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 Maintenance cycle Replace Check and replace when user call occurs Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth Points and cautions Fixing section Section Fixing unit Press roller separation Maintenance part location Replace Check replace Method 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 Maintenance cycle Replace Clean with alcohol Check and replace when user call occurs Points and cautions Eject section Section Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley Maintenance part location Clean Clean Clean Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 Maintenance cycle Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Points and cautions Covers Section Covers Maintenance part location Method
62. 507 epouu 1e1doo sule ww G E WUW Q L3 epow 1ejuud sseuejenbs ag ww g uui Ger d usn ww G WW G 4091002 pow 1 d09 sseuejenbs e149je G LF d Busy 0 LF 191doo uolonpes juewebie uy G LF d Busy 968 0 1 9 1d09 uogeoyiuDeui 9600 L suoneouioeds Lei Ayyenb Beuul G90N uonoeurp Buruueos Mexne y u uoneouiuBeu uues eui Bunsn py s9gon uonoeuip Buruueos urew eui u uorneoniuDeui jJeuueos eui Bunsn py 990r uoneuisi6e1 e6pe Buipe jeuueos eui Bunsn py 49051 oul 193069 1euueos eui Bunsn py epeui lleoneuuolne ase sjueunsn pe Buiojjo eui Qz0890v2 N d reuiBuo peyroeds eui Dursn uni si Aj eoneuroine 1euueos y DBunsn py zeon uei eoueuejureur ueuw yeyo Iesel jeuibuo NIOuVIN 9 NIOHVNN V NIOuVIN 9 NIOHVN V ON Vue epoui eoueuejure y ju eui juawysnipe 1sn pe Buiuueos suibsew oDeuul epp ueos peulo eui Bunsnipy 1uBu pue yo eui Bunsn py uonduoseq 2 4 14 Maintenance parts list Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Upper lower paper feed pulley Upper lower separation pulley Upper lower fowarding pulley Bypass paper feed pulley Bypass separation pulley Bypass forwarding pulley Bypass feed roller 1 Bypass feed roller 2 Left registration roller Right registration roller Feed pulley Feed roller 1 Feed roller 2 Feed roller 3 Registration switch Lower re
63. 6 Remove the screw from the copier Figure 1 3 21 7 Insert the 12 P connector of the paper feed desk into the connector on the copier 12 P connector Figure 1 3 22 8 Route the harness through the clamp on the retainer Check that the harness and the motor do not contact 9 Fit the retainer using the screw removed in step 6 and the two CVM4 x 06 cross head chromate binding screws F J Y d Qo 10 Refit the cover Harness CVM4 x 06 cross head Motor chromate binding screws Figure 1 3 23 1 3 14 11 Turn the four leveling bolts until they reach the floor and adjust them to level the machine 12 Fit the two stays to the left of the paper feeder one toward the front and the other the rear using the two M4 x 10 chrome TP screws such that they make contact with the floor Note Do not fit the stays if the finisher is to be installed 13 Connect the copier power plug to the wall outlet and turn the copier power switch on 14 Load paper into the drawer and make a test copy to check the operation Adjusting the center line 1 Run maintenance item U993 Select PG1 and output a test pattern 2 Check if the center of the paper and that of the test pattern output are aligned If not perform the following adjustment 2FD 2FF 2FG
64. 6 4 Stop ring Separation shaft Separation pulley Figure 1 6 5 Machine front Machine rear Forwarding pulley Figure 1 6 6 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 Detaching and refitting the bypass separation bypass paper feed and bypass forwarding pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the bypass separation bypass paper feed and bypass forwarding pulleys Procedure Removing the bypass unit 1 Remove the four screws holding the lower right cover and then the cover 2 Remove the two screws holding the bypass unit and disconnect the two connectors and then remove the unit Removing the bypass separation pulley 3 Reverse the bypass unit and remove the spring and stop ring from the bypass separation pulley and move the bushing inside Lower right cover Figure 1 6 7 Connectors W Bypass unit Figure 1 6 8 Figure 1 6 9 Bushing Stop ring 2FD 2FF 2FG 4 Raise the bypass separation shaft as shown in the diagram remove the holder plate and the bushing and then remove the bypass separation pulley Take care not to remove the spring pin of the gear at the rear of the bypass separation shaft If it is removed refit it to its original position Removing the bypass paper feed pulley 5 Detach the connector of the bypass paper Switch and remove the wire from the three clamps 6 Remove the screw holding the bypass unit cover and then the cover 7 Remove the stop ring and bushing on the
65. 8x 2 S HSy UE oluo jeuiDuuo JL LL ev ue BuiAdog oN Heya Buluur L 2 4 4 2FD 2FF 2FG SW GLG UIN Su 60 SU Ce Sul vct ra w SW g ri sui zz sw OO a t sw 08 sui oi UIN SW OO sugp La Apeas afew 101 u09 Ayisuap doo one 00L Ole 9 LOA LOA OL ZOA ZL LEOA LLV QLOA eV 0L9A tta LLa 9LOA v LOA La 9LOA VI LLOA 98 9L9A 2VOL LI9A LL6 LL9A Watu OS Wad 8d Waq OL LMS3 MS3 MSU WA Wad ON N 104d 194 104 Wad wa Kay yes uoljeoyiubew samep seddn 1 do2 oy wo Jeded doo 2 8x LL py ue oluo eUIBIIO 2 8x LL py ue Bui do9 g oy meyo BuluurL 2 4 5 2FD 2FF 2FG Sul S S UIN 0 P a I duod 4 SW OO sw ZZ 3 p e o E D lt JojeJedes qof ay 0 uonoefe jo1 U09 Alisu p doo ojne 004 One Dal 01 29A L 9 0A SV 919A LE LIOA eNV 019A Wau ad WH OL NSagr MSS4 LMSA MSH ZL 9 9A gor 1OSS4 eV 9LOA tta LLa QLOA v LOA L8 9 19A VI LLOA 98 919A 2V0L LIOA LL 6 LEOA TOSSA WA Wau ON fi Todd L 194 194 Wad wa Kay ueis uoneoyiuDeui samep 1 ddn s91d09 oy wo saded doo 2 8x L L py ue oluo jeUIBIIO 2 8x LUF ue BulAdog 9 ON ueuo Hulwiy 2 4 6 2FD 2FF 2FG SW S S
66. Automatically correct the positions of the X and Y axes of the touch panel Purpose To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed and the key displayed at the upper left of the touch panel flashes 2 Press on the center of the key The key on lower right flashes 3 Press the center of the flashing Initialization of the touch panel is complete and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without initializing press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance mode No is displayed Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary 1 4 43 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DP Purpose To check the DP Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper 3 Select the item to be operated The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Operation ADP With paper single sided original RADP With paper doubl
67. Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC13 A5 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 20 The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate Broken bypass paper feed clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the bypass paper feed clutch Poor contact in the bypass paper feed clutch connec tor terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC6 A9 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 21 The bypass feed clutch does not op erate Broken bypass feed clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the bypass feed clutch Poor contact in the bypass feed clutch connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC6 A11 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 22 The registration clutch does not op erate Broken registration clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the registra tion clutch Poor contact in the regis tration clutch connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none r
68. Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 5 49 Problem Causes check procedures 2FD 2FF 2FG Corrective measures 23 A paper jam in the switchback section is indicated during copying jam in switchback unit Jam code 53 Broken feedshift switch actuator Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is broken Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken switchback eject switch actuator Check visually and replace the switchback eject switch if its ac tuator is broken Defective switchback eject switch With 5 V DC present at CN5 2 on the switchback unit main PCB check if CN5 4 on the switchback unit main PCB remains low when the switchback eject switch is turned on and off If it does replace the switchback eject switch 24 A paper jam in the duplex section is indicated during copying jam in du plex paper convey ing section 1 Jam code 60 Broken feedshift switch actuator Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is broken Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the opera
69. Every service Maintenance cycle Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Points and cautions Other Image quality Check and adjust Every service Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs 2 4 17 2FD 2FF 2FG Optional devices supplied parts list Paper feed desk Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide Part No Retainer Pin CVM4 x 06 cross head chromate binding screw Stay M4 x 10 chrome TP screw Network facsimile System Name used in service manual Retainer Pin Cross head chromate binding screw CVM4 x 06 Stay Chrome TP screw M4 x 10 Name used in installation guide 3AT02150 74315200 B1004060 3AT02250 B4104100 Part No Fax board Auxiliary power source PCB assembly 100 V Auxiliary power source PCB assembly 200 V Fax kit label sheet Certification label 120 V only Certification label 120 V only Modular connecter cable 120 V only M3 x 06 chrome binding screw Fax cable Fax PCB Power cable NCU board assembly N A NCU board assembly CTR NCU cable Printing System Name used in service manual Fax board Auxiliary power source PCB assembly 100 V Auxiliary power source PCB assembly 200 V Fax kit label sheet FCC68 label sheet 120 V only LINE IC label sheet 120 V only B Modular connecter cable 120 V only TP A chrome binding screw M3 x 06 Fax cable Fax PCB Power cable NCU board assembly N
70. I y No je 68 apes 16 z Oz 5 N 4 8 wu b m ora QNO rir 2 6 a ti AL e O i NIN ERI E a ALS y zld AS z le D I m Ob No JS 18 5 L 6 dT ON L a 8 ONS OL EE m o 4 oz EI T bd u x 9 9 HNS u gt Low zi H c EZ EE s D le H AS Ie El 8 9 oos r m et ONS DIE ZE E q tt v QNS 6 SD z D E36 g SY Jet 138 ag 8 8 c L L g 9 ONS LZ CS a5 o z elt A3 to lt MSH 3l 8 I i K a k ad Sqso SL gt 8 S E Zei LEE QNS A Sg Dan o sitt D Wad d31 Fo Sano E 5 MSO er oL AS ME 20 ta c mso 6 TDI 33HAWS i E TI 9 o t AS EL che INWS t I LL 10884 L zt v x CL lt ZNWS or E desser L I L LL ouer LL pje eWWS 0 S EL AVeH i Ia MSdHS OL SK PAWS 9L Hqueys ok fc er 6 9 SW WS S 5 pro Lf m bbe EN 95 2 L m 5 8 WONS x Ba HI SADON c E e a A L West 6 8 2 1 MONS 5 ER 9ig 9A3WOd te lE g d EOS E 5 Ze HINS y gt 98 sig ZAO te WE 5 9 8 0L JTHVNJWS e ze vig 343910 3g 25 z H wns S amp tuc Wau NO dAVT Jz s eig Sg 9 9 QNO S tz MSdHS Ir 8g zig SNVOS e Bes 3 aNd Lig 9NVOS 6 6 a d Or m org ZNVOS 98 CAS g AS 68 8NVOS 0 x o 2 18 L 1 T c HOD DD a 2 g v f 278 Lv 88 d319Id Sig e eo 0o gt mm AS a 18 EmDee oa ON 1HOnxova cc 95 9g i L 9 Ad SE Vr s As Ei oa ago sri 10H 1400 rs eos O R 8 rg 340 dWv T gr e 8 0 As ed Abed Ot L
71. If none replace the switch Defective power source PCB With AC present check for 24 V DC at YC1 1 3 4 V DC at YC1 6 and YC1 7 5 1 V DC at YC1 9 on the power source PCB If none replace the power source PCB 2 The drive motor does not operate C2000 Poor contact in the drive motor connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken drive motor gear Check visually and replace the drive motor if necessary Defective drive motor Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drive motor oper ates when YC11 9 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the drive motor Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC 11 9 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 3 The paper feed mo tor does not operate C2500 Poor contact in the paper feed motor connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken paper feed motor gear Check visually and replace the paper feed motor if necessary Defective paper feed mo tor Run maintenance item U030 and check if the paper feed motor operates when YC11 10 on the main PCB goes low If not re place the paper feed motor Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC 11 10 on the main PCB goes
72. LS D EE zl ANS Goa EC N t MOER LL NS SEL u H TMS E aac eewer 68 via GN Ob be MEME terz 9 pe lee Tass SUN e a SIY 6 MSM 200 8 3 I LI Eat sia aoe sig p Le APZOT Ed if K EIN St lv AS Tote 5 4 Aved ui BINS i NOLLdO S OND og AF ONS T gt PN dau 80d Ge AS iy a SMS t z oo i Gu 6 QNO IJN ZY rer IIe 9 o 2 L L HOM a L8 E DENSIS y 9 oL aq v 3SVA001 01 Zb AS on es roo lt AVS GND t lt ra siy 5 8Y Aan EISES S o z Klee 6 TT US ON ONS gig L Aves D 5 lt 8 op H gt sia S s 7 ii T w GND 8 e ARA ON 5 S Jery z a ul E So Zrou es berg ON ery ONS jg HH 8 S gt D oa S S GN SIE WE vr ONG oz asn 619 AS ozy 3 2 g z zw p QNO SIS E Gg ye ON o ozy ONE 2 EN 9 zt Mofe ON o oza Ag 028 Hess E s T3S3H ks L aSva001 01 E L 1deSdd X F N a ow L 6 Ms ois 13S i 9l E rL z 2 o L ZL MES z ZL j DASS EI u a x 2 Ave 24 g u 9 QNS SIS HH O ui c OL QND S Ave i I 8 ui S H jo g e 282 ve DS m i Se qw 8 SE E E Es Es Sa M nunwa d Z 9 4 XL z q 1Wdd Sj Ei pg t2 eg gs ES pro SB Wid EE ONE si 6 P 8 S ur LOND G y Oe o E eg 9 F o cla Z6 HE Tore QNO i lt US AS Z EE Z lt OND Tr SISI3S z E p Od od o Elie 1353H 8 uz Ei ved i u Tks Wo g NN L DNI H Si S ors l t enee 226 6 gang s i vL OL c 61 dNOWJO t
73. LUND jiu BEDS Mmm E J AE E m Hal ce s z MSMSO lvo ze ANS D DE Le MSS M Z omon 2 ZL am 6 Thy be MSS te f u MSISO J sre 2 THIS gt aei DL sta Ve Ot S6 sISINW ez 2 W3H Ind ssn ee Atte tel 9c GND 52 PLE HI IT N m Z MzOXTTWINA za AS Zz c Ki S 4a z gz OXt 8c 88 lt SN3SWAH s tab E m Mi 2 SNN x L6 dNOS t B GND ez 68 ONO H4 Dr 2 a t ee at Je l igayvaqs oe ZOEN Ge org ke HL E br E Haga o0 1 bere n E SIE O P gt z 0L 2 HE I S ze L3S3HXV ze Ave si iz 3 ls o o Tele x z 2 99 HSA 8 5 ae vg LAGVgHXVd gs 5 og Ou O8 zz o gt gzl gt 914 0 uj 9 iu NOS H ee AC e ol jojjo Elei zr b Fr av ses 138i 1 SE Aver ve 5s P sg AVZOT Bes a 3 os aan o as S Lamae va 104d 3 u S OL HSN m HE SISNIVW gt Z L je lies 3 lt 4 zi BQAHW Je 9 ano I8 omg DS x gy Bj din SS Dee e W 8 moor 8 8 Arza S x a A L amp uj Z gc LO 6 i TIH O o ui L pt T3S 8 o zi els GND op 8 LZ z E amp sz 2 amp 9 aX8NIVA2 i Ave Hote ey z d ox z E x Toddna st Z 5 o eq zo eg QNO a in o DEZ nee eno ea 8 89 SN 29 pWeoadnd P a S 5 5 mS a GND 9a x sa AS e E a a TM 5 m oq K mana 48 HH SES 8 pis e L 8 A M E H 88 lt 5 Jt T DR AS aia H3MOd XV4 HOS od ana Z 5 g E AS
74. No developing bias is output Defective main PCB Defective high voltage transformer PCB See page 1 5 38 34 The original size is not detected Defective original detec tion switch If the level of YC5 2 on the scanner drive PCB does not change when the original detection switch is turned on and off replace the original detection switch 35 The original size is not detected cor rectly Original is not placed cor rectly Check the original and correct if necessary Poor contact in the original size detection sensor con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective original size de tection sensor Check if sensor operates correctly If not replace it 36 The touch panel keys do not work Poor contact in the touch panel connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective touch panel or operation unit PCB If any keys do not work after the touch panel has been initial ized replace the touch panel or operation unit PCB 37 The message re questing paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the upper drawer Poor contact in the upper paper switch connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cabl
75. OFF Ground 24 V DC supply for BYPPFCL BYPPFCL ON OFF 24 V DC supply for BYPFCL BYPFCL ON OFF 5 V DC supply for TDDSW TDDSW ON OFF Ground OFS ON OFF Ground FRCSW ON OFF Ground CFM3 ON OFF Ground 5 V DC supply for BYPPLSW BYPPLSW ON OFF Ground Connected to the high voltage transformer PCB BVSEL R24V GND MHVDR HVCLK RHVDR RISEL TICTL TVSEL THVDR THRDR THFDR TISENS TVSENS OO 0 00000000 0to5VDC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0to 5 V DC 0to 5 V DC 0to 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Developing bias control voltage 24 V DC supply for HVTPCB Ground Main charging ON OFF Developing bias CLOCK signal Separation charging ON OFF Separation charging control voltage Transfer charging control voltage Transfer limit voltage Transfer charging ON OFF Transfer reverse bias remote signal Transfer forward bias remote signal Transfer current detection signal Transfer current detection signal Connected to the laser scanner unit 5V SAFE SAMPLE POWCONT LASER VDO VDO GND PD GND R24V GND SCAN SCRDYN SCCLK O O O O O O O O O 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 5 V DC supply for LSU LSU SAMPLE signal LSU POWCONT signal LSU LASER signal LSU VIDEO signal LSU VIDEO signal Ground LSU PD signal Ground 24 V DC su
76. Oa S S Wa 2 Ez l 6l e t Sis saa WOO E s mx Olai zL 8 v e 13HWOO0 o gt s AS Z 3 LL EONS IR 9 2 3Gnow50 S 034 e d L NI ONE 91 9 L S lt gNO NWO 8 b Lt DAZA ro ra Hen STZ SE EE i L LT Meel ug 8 De a S Be Ree z z ano 2 lt z s gt Drog 6 OL Z WN OF ONE c E kand aT L ze UNS Hm DT IW WOO A y v ano ME VW E s Ave 4 UI rz QNO S Dram E E q v W3 Ave E lt ZILE at S l TONIHIX3 9 9 ONE 9 za ELE E E O EE Come 2 2 Tana z v LS l0Sd8S gy ER 8 8 GNO 9 V WwSoOBLH n8 6 B ayia S 8 LOV 1OSd8S gg 8 lt IN HS H 6 qu 6 de SOD z g E 9 zz m z 947 4 1030 dg 6 lt IGSTq L OL q s S D er 2 o L 9 3405833 ot al 0t o ONS vu Lg i ca E GIL C HIHV3 cu IL lt SNASH 37 viv ONE zt 9 oa a 8 OS 3AH3S3H gg WW LL begiert ON zL ely zz zo 6 ie OSS48S 886 SE a asa ZL 2L QNO Gi Ave INHO S gos v WOH E OL go ag __TASXV4 EL EL ONASAdaT ng Sos HE wa ciue a Da Eeer Sk T as D ano f STT CIS BE oe vz bo mz User g H real SL ee lv Se IL L Eas rs o vi 8 z2 e LEJdAIDON ar ONASAOd 2 DI om L Hel maman yy 9 91 OOOHO oi 94 quo e Hoss OL EN efi MS8SO Cu DAN ji t eNA L 7 Ave sry H c8 VL81 er gi ENOOHNO i 8l GND L SV ssa 1 9 Hor 89 a J SL 8 al vs ei OIOOHNO gi 6t oinoaii3 o 9v AS INA 84 SI 9 DS eg Oz a HOONE gel oz GND iz M GNO S 8 5
77. Replace the switchback unit main PCB and check for correct operation Bitmap problem There is a problem with the data or address bus of the bitmap DRAM The DIMM on the memory PCB does not operate correctly Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation DIMM installed incorrectly Check if the DIMM is inserted into the Socket on the main PCB correctly Defective DIMM Replace the DIMM and check for correct operation Optional DMA problem DMA transmission of compressed decompressed rotated relocated or blanked out image data does not complete within the specified period of time Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation 1 5 23 2FD 2FF 2FG Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive cannot be accessed Poor contact of the hard disk drive connector terminals Check the connection of connectors YC49 on the main PCB and hard disk drive and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective hard disk drive Run U024 HDD formatting without turning the power off to initialize the hard disk Replace the hard disk drive and check for correct operation if the problem is still detected after initialization Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for correc
78. Secondary paper feed does not start Secondary paper feed does not start within 30 s of arrival of paper at the registration section section Misfeed in registration transfer section The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 1657 ms of feed switch 1 FSW1 turning off The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 1657 ms of feed switch 1 FSW1 turning on Fixing sec tion Misfeed in fixing section bypass The eject switch ESW does not turn on within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 2983 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on 1 5 4 Misfeed in fixing section upper drawer The eject switch ESW does not turn on within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 2983 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on Section Jam code Description 2FD 2FF 2FG Conditions Fixing sec tion 42 Misfeed in fixing section lower drawer The eject switch ESW does not turn on within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 2983 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on Misfeed in fixing section paper feeder upper drawer The eject switch ESW does not turn on within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on
79. Selecting SC Whole mode OFF Not selecting SC Whole mode Initial setting ON 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting an item is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Setting SELECT TEMP HUM 1 Select either TEMP or HUM 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Setting range Initial setting TEMP 0 to 100 20 HUM 0 to 999 50 3 Press the start key The value is set and the screen br selecting an item is displayed Setting SELECT VELLUM MODE 1 Select either ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Selecting SC Whole mode when using thin paper OFF Not selecting SC Whole mode when using thin paper Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting an item is displayed Setting SELECT NORMAL MODE 1 Select either MODEO or MODE1 The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description MODEO Selecting SC Whole mode when using plain paper MODE1 Not selecting SC Whole mode when using plain paper Initial setting MODEO 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting an item is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number Purpose To
80. The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the paper feed location for the printer The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description FIRST SECOND Upper drawer Lower drawer THIRD Optional upper drawer FOURTH Optional lower drawer LCF Optional large paper deck 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed 1 4 60 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No U342 Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray is selected as the eject location Purpose According to user request sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description Description ON Sets restriction on the number of sheets OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets Details of restriction number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed Condition Number of sheets When no optional ejection device is installed 250 When the job separator or duplex unit is installed 150 When the finisher is installed 100 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selectiong a maintenance item No i
81. U101 is run If not replace the main PCB Defective high voltage transformer PCB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 10 on the high voltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage transformer PCB No LSU laser is output A Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit Defective main PCB Check if YC8 4 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the main PCB No developing bias is output Defective main PCB Check if YC7 1 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the main PCB Defective high voltage transformer PCB 1 5 38 Check if developing bias voltage is output when the main PCB is normal while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage transformer PCB 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 No image appears Causes entirely black 1 No main charging Causes 2 Exposure lamp fails to light Check procedures corrective measures No main charging Broken main charger wire Replace the main charger unit Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire grid and shield The connector terminals of the high voltage transformer PCB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Def
82. V LOA 21904 7 UI VI LLOA LI SW 8 L tte SUI EJ UN 98 919A OH waa ZLOL ELOA Wad Sul 87 gt r Su 00 TL LE 6 LLOA wa Kay Wels Apeas abew J041u02 Ayisuap doo one 90 One UONeOWIUBeW 49Me4p 1eddn ys p peo 1eded au wow Jeded doo Lx LL EV JO sl 9 us om OJUO JeUIBIIO AU LL Ey ue BuiAdod snonunuog Qr ON meya Buluur1 2 4 10 2FD 2FF 2FG se s q j s 1 SW 60 Sur 00 I D sd 4 dw de sw 67 Sw 67 SW vL SW 08 Ges LuQZxuq uAuNvYnuNAAAAAAAN An QOOOECEEEEEEE IEEE e SW zz SW 8 Ul LA OL ZOA eV ELOA LV ELOA ZI LLOA LEV 919A 2V 019A tta LLG 91OA T 29A SV ELOA 2L V LOA VI LLOA 98 919A sO gt 2V0OL LIOA SW gp Apeas feu Sui QOL Jo 3uoo Ayisuap doo jenuew 95001 One uoneorruDeuir IoMeJp 1M0 deep poo Joded oy wow aded doo 2 9x LL py ue o1uo JeurDuo 2 8x LL py ue Bui doo a LE 6 LEOA Wad 8d Way OL MS4dGa MS4d 2MS3 LMS3 MS3 MSH Wa Wad ON T1 194dGa 10940 194 2104 FTO OH wad Wad wa Kay URIS LL ON Heyo Buluu L 2 4 11 2FD 2FF 2FG ana HL Dees BulAdoo xejdnp JO JUsWSNipe ue yew o dd NG NO 7194 Dees BuiKdoo xejdnp JO 1ueuujsn pe ue yew o eounos Jad
83. V AC 60 Hz 12 A Max 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 6 5 A Max Max 1450 W DP paper feeder large paper deck job separator 3000 sheet finisher 1000 sheet finisher booklet stitcher built in finisher key counter fax board printer board network printer board network scanner board hard disk 1 1 2 Parts names and their functions 1 Copier 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Original cover 2 Operation panel 8 Conveying cover handle 4 Conveying cover 5 Bypass tray 6 Insert guides Toner container Toner container release lever 9 Toner disposal tank Cleaning shaft Front cover 23 Main power switch Figure 1 1 1 3 Copy store section Platen D Original size scales Upper drawer Lower drawer Side cover Length adjustment plate GO Width adjustment lever Handles for transport 3 Main power switch cover Only for metric specifications 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 2 Operation panel 9 E q 46 9 O 9 W c6 7 a ea e Management S Energy Saver om Jo coma CD 2 7 OO f0 Fine OOO ese 15 Gere 0 9 9 643 319 Fax Il 0 Cl Start Figure 1 1 2 D Start key Indicator lamp 2 Stop clear key 3 Reset key 4 Energy Saver preheat key 5 Interrupt key Indicator lamp 6 Management key Defau
84. W KYOCERA KM 3035 KM 4035 KM 5035 SERVICE MAN UAL Published in Apri 2FG11 CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions CAUTION Double pole neutral fusing Version history Version Date Replaced pages Remarks 1 19 October 2004 2 2 2 3 0 22 April 2005 Contents 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 1 3 6 1 3 7 1 3 7 1 1 3 8 Chapter 1 4 overall rerised 1 6 29 1 6 30 1 6 37 1 6 41 1 6 42 2 4 15 This page is intentionally left blank KSOCERd Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities Safety warnings and precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property These symbols are described below AXDANGER High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol AAWARNING Ser
85. While scanning the first face reverse face of the original in the double sided original mode the original switchback switch OSBSW does not turn on within 770 ms of the DP timing switch DP TSW turning on During the switchback operation of the second or later origi nal in the double sided original mode the original switchback switch OSBSW remains off when the trailing edge of the preceding original turns the DP timing switch DPTSW off Optional large pa per deck Large paper deck se quence error jam A communication sequence error occurs between the copier and the large paper deck Optional built in fin isher Jam between the finisher and copier The paper conveying switch does not turn on within 1550 ms of the signal requesting paper ejection is output from the copier Intake jam During paper intake from the copier the paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn off within 1960 to 3480 ms de pending on paper size of paper conveying switch PCSW turning on Jam during paper con veying for batch ejection 4 When ejection a stack of paper the paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn on within 1590 ms of the paper con veying motor PCM turning on Jam during paper con veying for batch ejection 2 When ejection a stack of paper the paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn off within 2260 to 3190 ms varies de pending on the paper size of the paper conveying motor PCM
86. YEAR 0 30 cpm 1 40 50 cpm 30 OFF ON OFF FACE DOWN Section Mode setting Image processing Network scanner Maintenance item contents Setting the ejection restriction Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Setting preheat energy saver mode Setting the value for maintenance due indication Setting the sleep mode operation Adjusting margins of image printing Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Initializing the scanner NIC Setting Data Base Assistant Setting the time out Setting the LDAP Setting the enterprise mode Setting scan To FTP Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Checking clearing finisher punch count Checking clearing the paper jam counts Checking clearing the service call counts Checking clearing counts by optional devices Resetting partial operation control Changing the total counter value Clearing the black ratio data Checking clearing copy counts by paper sizes Setting backup data reading writing Checking the copy counts Checking clearing the system error counts Rewriting FAX program Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts Checking machine life counts Setting the default magnification ratio of the default drawer Setting the type of cooling fan Setting the type of paper corveying unit Outputtin
87. Yes key 1 4 2 1 Press the Management Def Set key 2 Select Copy Printer output mgt and then press the Change key 3 Select All or Each key Scanner function management ON OFF Note This setting is only available when the optional network scanner board is installed in the copier Fax function management ON OFF Note This setting is only available when the optional fax kit is installed in the copier Response to exceeded restriction Determines whether further use of the machine will be canceled or an error message will be generated when a department ID code has exceeded its set limit 1 Press the Management Def Set key 2 Select Excess of limit Setting and then press the Change key 3 Select Is not permitted or Only warning key 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Copy default Exposure mode Selects the exposure mode at power on 1 Select Exposure mode and then press the Change key 2 Select Manual or Auto key Exposure adjustment step Default copy limit Press the Management Def Set key 2 Select Def Val of coun limit and then press the Change key 3 Enter the default copy limit using the numeric keys The limit can be set to any 1 page increment up to 999 999 Total count for specified pa
88. adjustments in the order below using the specified original Adjusting the scanner center line U067 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration U066 Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction U065 Adjusting the scanner margins U403 When this maintenance item is performed the settings in U065 U066 U067 and U403 are also changed Purpose Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner Method 1 Place the specified original P N 2A068020 on the contact glass 2 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When adjustment is complete each adjusted value is displayed Display Description SCAN CENTER Scanner center line SCAN TIMING Scanner leading registration SUB SCAN Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction MAIN SCAN Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction SCAN A MARGIN Scanner reading margin A side SCAN B MARGIN Scanner reading margin B side SCAN C MARGIN Scanner reading margin C side SCAN D MARGIN Scanner reading margin D side If a problem occurs during auto adjustment DATA XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and operation stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items Completion Press the stop clea
89. and left sides and hold them For the left front handle for transport open the door and push it into the machine before pulling out the handle Handle for transport Handle for transport Handle for transport Figure 1 3 1 r 1 Unpack 120 V specifications D Copier 2 Power cord 8 Upper pad Sheet 5 Outer case 6 Inner frame Eject spacer Hinge joints 9 Bottom pad Machine cover Front left pad 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Figure 1 3 2a Unpacking 42 Front right pad A Rear left pad Rear right pad amp 9 Skid Plastic bag Bar code labels Bottom spacer Plastic bag GO Operation guide Plastic bag 3 M3 x 8 screws Caution Place the machine on a level surface 1 3 3 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 230 V specifications es ols D Copier 2 Power cord 3 Upper left pad 4 Upper right pad Outer case 6 Inner frame Eject spacer Belts 9 Bottom pad Machine cover Front left pad Front right pad Figure 1 3 2b Unpacking 3 Rear left pad Rear right pad Skid Plastic bag Bar code labels Bottom spacer Plastic bag GO Operation guide Plastic bag 3 M3 x 8 screws 3 Spacer Caution Place the machine on a level surface Remove the tapes and pad 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 1 Remove the tapes holding the f
90. archive problem When power is turned on the compressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PCB was not successfully decompressed Defective fax software Install the fax software to Ver 2 xx or later Defective fax control PCB Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation Fax control PCB CG FONT archive problem When power is turned on the compressed CG font in the Flash ROM on the fax control PCB was not successfully decompressed Defective fax software Install the fax software to Ver 2 xx or later Defective fax control PCB Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation 1 5 24 Fax control PCB incompatibility detection problem Fax software is not compatible with MMI software Fax software version is earlier Check the version of fax software and upgrade it to a version that accommodates the machine Optional Contents 2FD 2FF 2FG Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Upper lift motor problem When the upper drawer is inserted the upper lift limit switch does not turn on within 6 s of the upper lift motor turning on and the upper lift limit Switch does not turn on in a retry operation after turning off the upper lift motor for 200 ms At this time removal and insertion of the drawer is prompted Even after removal and insertion of the drawer the upper lift limit switch does not t
91. by winding it one turn around the core Figure 1 3 133 3 Connect the wire to the YC49 connector on the main PCB and to the connector on the CJ YC49 connector hard disk Caution Connect the blue connector of the wire to the YC49 connector of the main PCB and connect the black connector of the wire to the connector of the hard disk Connect the 4 pin connector of the machine to the YC1 connector on the sub power supply PCB of the hard disk Black connector Figure 1 3 134 1 3 56 2FD 2FF 2FG 4 Insert the hard disk and secure it with the screw that has been removed in step 1 5 Insert the power plug of the copier to the outlet and turn the power switch on 6 Run maintenance item U024 to initialize the hard disk Figure 1 3 135 1 3 57 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 15 Installing the 1000 sheet finisher option Procedure 1 Open the left cover of the copier 2 Remove the two screws securing the feedshift guide assembly and then the assembly 3 Fit the curl eliminator to the left cover such that the projections on the cover fit into the two ends of the curl eliminator 4 Secure the curl eliminator using the two screws removed in step 2 5 Close the left cover 6 Fit the latch catch to the left cover using two M4 x 10 binding screws 1 3 58 Maa 7 Lr E w ss Wi 7 Naa LIV PI lt 22 CUT ss JU AC GTI ASS L EEUU LA EOM lt JU zm
92. charger on LASER ON OFF Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off Method 1 Select the item to be operated 2 Press the start key The selected operation starts 3 To stop operation press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item when main charger output stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting high voltages Description Changes the developing bias voltage and transfer voltage by changing the developing bias control voltage and transfer control voltage Purpose To check the developing bias and the transfer voltage or to take measures against drop of image density or background fog Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Adjustable range Initial setting DEV BIAS Developing bias AC component 255 to 255 10 to 10 0 frequency at image formation DEV DUTY Developing bias AC component 100 to 100 5 to 5 0 duty at image formation DEV SBIAS Developing shift bias potential 1 to 1 0 to 1 0 at image formation TC DATA Transfer control voltage 0 to 255 0 to 255 120 When changing the setting value be sure to adjust within the adjustalle range Increasing the DEV BIAS setting males the
93. check the drum number Method Press the start key The drum number is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 38 1 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 38 2 Description Displaying the drum history Description Displays the past record of machine rumber and the drum counter Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item and press the start key Past record of 5 cases is displayed Display Description MACHINE No HISTORY Past record of machine number DRUM COUNT HISTORY Past record of drum counter Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Initial setting for the developer Description Replenishes toner to the developer unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the deeloping unit Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press the start key The time that elapses until initialization is complete and whether or not toner remains in the developing unit 0 No 1 Yes are displayed Supplement The following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item Clearing the developing drive time U157
94. clamp Remove the power source unit from the rear side of the machine 2FD 2FF 2FG Figure 1 3 14 Aperture Drawer heater I S II O Nj Ce L E Band Figure 1 3 15 Power source unit Figure 1 3 16 1 3 11 2FD 2FF 2FG 6 Remove the two screws and pull out the wire of the drawer heater that has been put out of the rear frame while raising the power source L y PCB unit 7 Insert the connector of the drawer heater into Power sourc the connector of the machine 8 Refit all the removed parts Connector Wire of the drawer heater Figure 1 3 17 1 3 12 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 5 Installing the paper feeder option Preparation gt 1 R he from th ier SE emove the lower drawer from the Copier 3E Q Lower drawer Figure 1 3 18 2 Place the copier on top of the paper feeder with the positioning pins at the front left and right of the paper feeder aligned with the holes in the base of the copier Paper feeder Figure 1 3 19 3 Secure the copier to the paper feeder using the two pins 4 Refit the lower drawer to the copier Pin Ll Pin EVI s CAL 5 z Paper feeder Figure 1 3 20 1 3 13 2FD 2FF 2FG 5 Remove the screw and then the cover from the rear of the paper feeder
95. connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U033 and check if YC9 B2 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 26 The cleaning lamp does not turn on Poor contact in the clean ing lamp connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective cleaning lamp Check for continuity If none replace the cleaning lamp Defective main PCB If the cleaning lamp turns on when YC9 B7 on the main PCB is held low replace the main PCB 27 The exposure lamp does not turn on Poor contact in the expo sure lamp connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective inverter PCB Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with CN1 1 and CN1 2 on the inverter PCB go low If not replace the inverter PCB Defective scanner drive PCB Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC1 3 on the scanner drive PCB goes low If not replace the scanner drive PCB Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC37 3 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 28 The exposure lamp
96. darker than the other See page 1 5 40 9 Black dots appear on 10 Image is blurred the image See page 1 5 41 See page 1 5 41 See page 1 5 41 11 The leading edge of the 12 The leading edge of the image is consistently image is sporadically misaligned with the misaligned with the original original See page 1 5 43 16 Fixing is poor ho See page 1 5 43 See page 1 5 44 See page 1 5 44 17 Image is out of focus 18 Image center does not 19 Image is not square align with the original center See page 1 5 42 13 Paper creases See page 1 5 42 See page 1 5 42 14 Offset occurs 15 Image is partly missing See page 1 5 43 See page 1 5 44 See page 1 5 45 See page 1 5 45 1 5 37 1 No image appears 2FD 2FF 2FG Causes entirely white ds Causes No transfer charging 2 No LSU laser is output 3 No developing bias is output Check procedures corrective measures No transfer charging The connector terminals of the high voltage transformer PCB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Check if YC7 10 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance item
97. displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Enterprise mode setting is enabled OFF Enterprise mode setting is disabled Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed 1 4 64 1 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 64 2 Description Setting scan To FTP Description Sets whether or not scan to FTP setting is enalled if an optional network scanner is installed This maintenance mode is efBctive for only 120 V specifications Purpose According to user request changes the setting Supplement It is not possible to turn setting simultaneously with U510 Setting the enteprise mode to ON Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Scan to FTP setting is enabled OFF Scan to FTP setting is disaded Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ky The screen for s
98. does not turn off Defective inverter PCB If the exposure lamp does not turn off with CN1 1 and CN1 2 on the inverter PCB high replace the inverter PCB Defective scanner drive PCB If YC1 3 on the scanner drive PCB are always low replace the scanner drive PCB 29 The fixing heater does not turn on C6000 Broken wire in fixing heater M or S Check for continuity across each heater If none replace the heater M or S Fixing unit thermostat trig gered Check for continuity across thermostat If none remove the cause and replace the thermostat 30 The fixing heater does not turn off Broken fixing unit thermis tor wire Measure the resistance If it is Q replace the fixing unit ther mistor Dirty sensor part of the fixing unit thermistor Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts 31 Main charging is not performed 1 5 50 Broken main charger wire Leaking main charger housing Poor contact in the high voltage transformer PCB connector terminals Defective main PCB Defective high voltage transformer PCB See page 1 5 39 Problem Causes 2FD 2FF 2FG Check procedures corrective measures 92 Transfer charging is not performed Poor contact in the high voltage transformer PCB connector terminals Defective main PCB Defective high voltage transformer PCB See page 1 5 38 33
99. from MPCB Ground OPCB R LAMP OFF signal 24 V DC supply from MPCB Ground Ground PH LED signal PH KEY signal Connected to the touch panel 2 3 20 O O OO 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse Touch panel detection voltage Y2 Touch panel detection voltage X2 Touch panel detection voltage Y1 Touch panel detection voltage X1 Connector Signal Voltage 2FD 2FF 2FG Description CN5 Connected to the LCD OO JO OQ G N LCD FRAME LCD LOAD LCD CP LCD VSS SG LCD VDD 5V LCD VSS SG LCD CONT LCD DISP OFF LCD D0 LCDD1 LCD D2 LCD D3 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse GND 5V DC GND Analog 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse LCD FRAME signal LCD LOAD signal LCD CP signal LCD VSS signal LCD VDD signal LCD VSS signal LCD control signal LCD DISPLAY signal LCD DO data LCD D1 data LCD D2 data LCD D3 data Connected to the back light CCFT HOT N C N C CCFT COLD O oooooooooooos O i Analog LCD BACK LIGHT control signal Not used Not used LCD BACK LIGHT control signal 2 3 21 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 3 4 Scanner drive PCB SDPCB Stepping motor driver IC1 SM ENABLE ER EL ON REM ODSW SHPSW Figure 2 3 8 Scanner drive PCB block
100. front of the bypass paper feed shaft 1 6 6 Holder plate Bushing Figure 1 6 10 Bypass unit cover Connector Figure 1 6 11 Bushing Figure 1 6 12 8 Raise the bypass paper feed shaft as shown in the illustration remove the stop ring and then remove the bypass paper feed pulley Caution When fitting the bypass paper feed pulley keep the blue end of the paper feed toward the machine rear Removing the bypass forwarding pulley 9 Remove the wire of the bypass paper feed clutch from the clamp 10 Remove the stop ring and bypass paper feed clutch When refitting insert the cutout in the bypass paper feed clutch over the stopper on the copier 11 Remove the screw from the cam at the rear of the bypass forwarding pulley shaft and move the cam and the bushing toward the inner side 2FD 2FF 2FG Bypass paper feed shaft Figure 1 6 13 Stop ring Bypass paper feed clutch Figure 1 6 14 Figure 1 6 15 2FD 2FF 2FG 12 Remove the stop ring of the bypass paper feed shaft and slide the bushing in the direction of the arrow 13 Slide the bypass forwarding pulley shaft temporarily toward the rear side and then raise it to remove from the bypass unit Remove the shaft while raising the actuator of the bypass paper switch 14 Remove the bushing an cam on the rear of the bypass forwarding pulley shaft 1 6 8 Stop ring Bypass paper feed shaft Figure 1 6 16
101. front right caster in the same manner as in step 4 so that the hook of the latch catch is aligned with the projection of the switchback unit when the finisher is joined to the copier viewed from front When the switchback unit is not installed 6 Adjust the height of the front right caster in the same manner as in step 4 so that the center of the hook of the latch catch is aligned with the marking of the finisher when the finisher is joined to the copier viewed from front Projection Marking DE b Hook Hook Figure 1 3 66 7 Adjust the height of the left two casters in the same manner as in step 4 so that the top and bottom gaps A between the finisher and the copier are the same when the finisher is A detached from the copier 8 Retighten the two screws on each of the four casters 9 Refut the two covers and four caps gt lt Figure 1 3 67 1 3 31 2FD 2FF 2FG Connecting the signal cable 1 2 3 Connect the signal cable of the finisher to the copier If the switchback unit has been installed connect the signal cable of the switchback unit as well Insert the copier power plug to the wall outlet and turn the power switch on Make test copies and check that the finisher and the switchback unit operate correctly Setting the booklet stapling position
102. g U14 gt 9 U50 U55 U58 U6 M U59 9 1 U57 8 U2 U9 YC15 ei Ut ue y7 El i gt 7 a ci U54 gt U8 U68 o U62 o YC45 YC16 9 o U67 YC4 YC8 YC13 YCi1 YC3 YC12 YC5 YC35 YC2 YC31 YC10 2 3 7 2FD 2FF 2FG Connector Pin No Signal Voltage Description YC1 Connected to the power source PCB ANOaRWD POWDOWN CFM4 ZCROSS 5 1V FH M FH S GND HEATER ON 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 5 1 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0to5VDC SLEEP signal CFM4 remote signal Zero cross signal 5 1V DC supply for PSPCB FH M ON OFF FH S ON OFF Ground Heater current monitor signal Connected to the power source PCB OO Joo G NS CH R24V GND GND GND 3 4V 3 4V 3 4V 5 1V 5 1V 24V 24 V DC 3 4 V DC 3 4 V DC 3 4 V DC 5 1 V DC 5 1 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC supply from SSW2 Ground Ground Ground 3 4 V DC supply from PSPCB 3 4 V DC supply from PSPCB 3 4 V DC supply from PSPCB 5 1 V DC supply from PSPCB 5 1 V DC supply from PSPCB 24 V DC supply from PSPCB Connected to the mailbox reverse unit and large paper deck paper feeder RXD GND TXD GND SET SIG RESET LCF TXD GND LCF RXD GND FEED SW SIG RESET On nu OO nn ON 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Serial signal from mailbox reverse unit Ground Serial signal for mailbox re
103. image darker decreasing it makes the image lighter Increasing the DEV DUTY setting males the image lighter decreasing it makes the image darker Increasing the DEV SBIAS setting males the image darker Increasing the TC DATA setting makes the transfer voltage higher and decreasing it males the voltage lower 3 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U109 Displaying the drum type Description Displays the drum surface potential set as EEPROM of the drum unit Purpose To check the drum surface potential Method Press the start key Drum surface potential V is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking clearing or changing the figure which is used as a reference when correcting the main charger potential output Purpose To check the drum status Also used to clear the count after replacing the drum during regular maintenance Since the count was cleared before shipping do not clear it when installing Method Press the start key The drum counter count is displayed Clearing 1 Pr
104. in the copier Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non scanned output VTC PG pattern Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the VTC PG pattern to be output Display PG pattern to be output Purpose PG1 Center line adjustment Lateral squareness adjustment Magnification adjustment 3 Press the interrupt key The copy mode screen is displayed 4 Press the start key A VTC PG pattern is output Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 75 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 5 1 Paper misfeed detection 1 Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs the copier immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903 To remove paper jammed in the copier open the front cover conveying cover side cover or drawer Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch 1or 2 off and on Misfeed in drawer Misfeed in bypass Jam code 10 Jam code 14 Jam code 11 nn ci Jam code 20 Jam code 12 Jam code 21 Jam code 13 Jam code 23 Jam code 15 Jam code 1
105. latch catch to the conveying cover using two M4 x 10 binding screws 1 3 22 LOSS HTK PS C PSS LIH SUA ass f eJ 2 ra P amp L J DN RT Ceo L1 L7 SE Si all Hale Feedshift guide assembly Z Conveying II Projection A N S Screw ZZ Z ie LOSS OILI LIS LK ce KS SEMIN Eph NING TAG Ay ZZ We J J gt lt J a e A Curl eliminator Re Figure 1 3 43 Conveying cover C Se ee e Figure 1 3 44 7 Remove 13 screws and take off the rear cover 8 Remove 13 screws and take off the shield cover 9 Insert the board supports into the three round holes of the IPC PCB Detach the 10 pin connector four wires from YC4 on the main PCB and connect it to J2 on the IPC PCB 2FD 2FF 2FG Rear cover Shield cover Screws Figure 1 3 46 Main PCB IPC PCB 10 Pin connector Figure 1 3 47 1 3 23 2FD 2FF 2FG 10 Connect J1 on the IPC PCB to YC15 on the main PCB 11 Insert the board supports into the three round holes of the main PCB and secure the IPC PCB 12 Refit the shield cover and rear cover d Main PCB pex Lj IPC PCB Round holes p m Board supports m 9 r L SE Board support Figure 1 3 48 13 Align the rail retainer with the groove of the g
106. levels of YC12 9 YC12 10 and YC12 11 on the main PCB change alternately when the width guide in the lower drawer is moved If not replace the lower paper width switch 42 The printing width of the paper on the bypass tray is not detected correctly 1 5 52 Poor contact in the bypass paper length switch con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective bypass paper length switch Check if YC6 B11 on the main PCB goes low when the bypass paper length switch is turned on If not replace the bypass pa per length switch Poor contact in the bypass paper width switch con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective bypass paper width switch Check if the levels of YC6 A1 YC6 A2 and YC6 A3 on the main PCB change alternately when the insert guide on the bypass table is moved If not replace the bypass paper width switch Problem Causes 2FD 2FF 2FG Check procedures corrective measures 49 A paper jam in the paper feed paper conveying or fixing section is indicated when the power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch feedshift switch or eject switch Check and remove if any Defective feed
107. list Description Outputs machine used circumstances list and clears the data Purpose To check the machine operation situation Also to clear the data Method Press the start key Outputting the list 1 Select OUTPUT 2 Press the start key to output the list Clearing 1 Select COUNT CLEAR 2 Press the start key to clear the count Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Setting the type of fixing unit Description Sets the type of fixing unit Purpose To change the setting according to the type of the fixing unit Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select New or Old The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description FIXING UNIT 0 Type 0 FIXING UNIT 1 Type 1 FIXING UNIT 2 Type 2 Initial setting FIXING UNIT 1 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Specifying the aging before copying Description Selects whether to perform aging before copying Purpose To set according to the preference of the user When copying A3 or B4 sized paper aging before copying takes extra time to start the first copy To
108. low If not replace the main PCB 4 The eject motor does not operate 1 5 46 Poor contact in the eject motor connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken eject motor gear Check visually and replace the eject motor if necessary Defective eject motor Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper ates when YC16 B11 YC16 B12 YC16 B13 and YC16 B14 on the main PCB go low If not replace the eject motor Defective eject switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding Switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Problem Causes 2FD 2FF 2FG Check procedures corrective measures 4 The eject motor does not operate Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC16 B11 YC16 B12 YC16 B13 and YC16 B14 on the main PCB go low If not replace the main PCB 5 The upper lift motor does not operate C1010 Broken upper lift motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the upper lift motor Poor contact in the upper lift motor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Check if 24 V DC is ou
109. lower and decreasing it makes the density higher 2 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on Purpose To check the exposure lamp Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press the start key The exposure lamp lights 3 To turn the exposure lamp off press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 23 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 24 Description Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position Purpose Used when white lines contirue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleanedThis is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate To prevent this problem the shading position should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains Method 1 Press the start key The screen for adjustment is displayed 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Shading position 8 to 2 0 0 17 mm
110. lower paper feed clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U247 and select the desk lower paper feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the desk lower paper feed clutch Check 7 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from bypass Jam code 14 Optional Paper on the bypass table is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the bypass paper feed pulley separation pulley or forwarding pulley of the bypass are de formed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken bypass feed switch actuator Check visually and replace bypass feed switch if its actuator is broken Defective bypass feed Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the bypass feed switch on and off manually Replace the bypass feed switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the bypass paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass paper feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the bypass paper feed clutch Check see page 1 5 49 1 5 11 2FD 2FF 2FG Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 8 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated
111. maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on and off manually Replace the registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective eject switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and off manually Replace the eject switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 2 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from upper drawer Jam code 10 Paper in the upper drawer is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the upper paper feed pulley separation pulley or forwarding pulley of the upper drawer are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 1 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace feed switch 1 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the upper paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the upper pa
112. original on the contact glass 1 6 31 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 1 6 4 Dr msectlon ioi te Re n e etri A re EU De aka aa h h gas 1 6 32 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unt 1 6 32 2 Detaching and refitting the main charger unt 1 6 32 3 Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw assemblies a a 1 6 33 1 6 5 Developing section EE 1 6 34 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unt 1 6 34 1 6 6 Transfer Section ipee erg iere it eite Rohe Guth alee uec yl awe Rd Fue dre freta tud 1 6 35 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assembly a 1 6 35 1 67 FIXING SECTION 2 5 edet i e de o e UE Hu ee Bue de 1 6 36 1 Detaching and refitting the fixing unit nennen 1 6 36 2 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws 1 6 36 3 Detaching and refitting the press roller a 1 6 37 4 Detaching and refitting the fixing heater M and S 1 6 38 b Detaching and refitting the heat roller A 1 6 39 6 Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor 1 and 3 1 6 40 7 Adjusting front position of the fixing unit adjusting lateral squareness 1 6 41 E eI IM s p E T BEES ST uuu t ee cla 1 6 42 1 Detaching and refitting the ozone filters only for 230 V specifications
113. page 1 6 32 Drum separation claw assemblies 2 Push the drum separation claw assemblies with the minus driver from the top of the corner hole and remove the claw assemblies 3 Replace the drum separation claw assemblies and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 6 61 1 6 33 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 6 5 Developing section 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the toner container and toner disposal tank 3 Remove the screw and turn the developing release lever in the direction of the arrow Developing release lever Figure 1 6 62 4 Remove the developing unit 5 Replace the developing unit and refit all the removed parts di EN Developing unit Figure 1 6 63 1 6 34 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 6 6 Transfer section 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assembly Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller assembly Procedure 1 Open the conveying cover 2 While holding down the projection slide the transfer roller assembly toward the front to remove it 3 Replace the transfer roller assembly and refit all the removed parts Transfer roller assembly Projection Figure 1 6 64 1 6 35 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 6 7 Fixing section 1 Detaching and refitting the fixing unit Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing uni
114. paper Checking motor operation feed paper Checking switches for paper conveying conveying ang Checking clutch operation cooling system Checking solenoid operation Adjusting the print start timing Adjusting the leading edge registration 0 5 0 1 5 Adjusting the center line 1 0 0 Setting folio size Length Width 330 210 Checking the copier cover switch Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper Regist data 0 0 0 Feed data 0 20 0 0 0 0 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed Drive motor Eject motor Polygon motor Optical Adjusting the scanner input properties Turning the exposure lamp on Adjusting the shading position Adjusting the scanner magnification Main scanning direction auxiliary scanning direction Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Adjusting the DP magnification Adjusting the DP scanning timing DP leading edge registration DP trailing edge registration Adjusting the DP center line Checking scanner operation Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Adjusting exposure in toner economy mode Outputting a MIP PG pattern Checking shading Adjusting the scanner automatically Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020 1 4 10 2FD 2FF 2FG 3
115. per step 2 Press the start key The value is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the individual border erase mode indication Description Sets whether to display the individual border erase mode on the copy default screen Purpose According to user request changes the setting Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press INDIVIDUAL BORDER ERASE The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description PAGE SETTING ON Displays the individual border erase mode PAGE SETTING OFF Not to display the individual border erase mode Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ky The screen for selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the Back line Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to male the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the optional DP Method Press the start key Th
116. prompted Even after removal and insertion of the drawer the lower lift limit switch does not turn on This problem occurs four times continuously During copying the lower lift limit Switch does not turn on within 200 ms of the lower lift motor turning on At this time removal and insertion of the drawer is prompted Even after removal and insertion of the drawer the lower lift limit switch does not turn on This problem occurs four times continuously Broken gears or couplings of the lower lift motor Replace the lower lift motor Defective lower lift motor Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the lower lift motor Poor contact of the lower lift motor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Defective lower lift limit switch Check if YC13 B15 on the main PCB goes low when the lower lift limit switch is turned off If not replace the lower lift limit switch Poor contact of the lower lift limit Switch connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable 1 5 25 2FD 2FF 2FG Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Desk upper lift motor problem When the upper drawer of the optional paper feeder is inserted the desk upper lift limit switc
117. screen for selecting an item is displayed Display Description COUNT Displays clears the jam counts TOTAL COUNT Displays the total jam counts Method Displays clears the jam counts 1 Select COUNT in the screen br selecting an item The count for jam detection by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the or keys 3 Select the counts for all jam codes and press the reset ley 4 Press the start key The count is cleared Method Displays the total jam counts 1 Select TOTAL COUNT in the screen br selecting an item The total number of jam counts by type is displayed 2 Use the or keys to switch the display The total number of jam count cannot be cleared To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear ley Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U904 Checking clearing the service call counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types Purpose To check the service call code status by types Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key The service call count is displayed by service call codes 2 Change the screen using the or keys Clearing 1 Select the count to be cleared The selected item is displayed in reverse To clear all counts pr
118. setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller Image density Setting 3 Setting 0 Dark Set to LIGHTER Set to DARKER Density adjustment Light Center Dark Figure 1 4 5 Exposure density gradient 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Seiting Density in text mode 1 Select the item to be adjusted The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Adjust the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual 0to3 0 density is set dark TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual 0to3 0 density is set light Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key 1 4 33 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U093 1 4 34 Setting Density in photo mode 1 Select the item to be adjusted The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Adjust the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual 0 to 3 0 density is set dark PHOTO LIGHTER Change in density when manual 0 to 3 0 density is set light Increasing the setting ma
119. solvents Select a room with good ventilation 6 Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine Machine front 1000 mm 393 g Machine rear 300 mm 1113 46 Machine right 300 mm 1113 1e Machine left 300 mm 1113 46 o WP a 745 mm 295 16 b 585 mm 23 c 646 mm 253 g I d 1510 mm 597 16 e 1032 mm 405 s d f 961 mm 3713 16 ZI eRe EA Figure 1 2 1 Installation dimensions 1 2 1 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 1 Unpacking and installation 1 Installation procedure C Start D Y Unpack Y Remove the tapes and pad Y Install the optional paper feeder or large paper deck Carry out initial developer setting maintenance item U130 Y Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2 I Load paper Y Install the original cover or the DP Y Output an own status report I maintenance item U000 Install other optional devices Y Exit maintenance mode Y Install the toner container Y Print out the user setting list Y Install the toner disposal tank Y Make test copies Y Connect the power cord Y Completion of the machine installation 1 3 1 2FD 2FF 2FG Moving the machine When moving the machine pull out the four handles for transport on the right
120. spots which are not on the originals appear on the copies 1 Press the Drum refresh key 2 Press the On key The drum refreshing process will begin This operation will take approximately 5 minutes 8 Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report Checks the total count of copies etc and prints out the information as a counter report 1 Press the Counter check key The total number of copies and printouts made will be displayed 2 Press the Print report key to print out a counter report 9 Document management default setting This setting is available when the optional hard disk is installed in the copier Document list print out Prints out each job list 1 Press the Print the list key to print out the document list you want Reset box Prints out each job list 1 Press the Reset Box key to delete all data for 2 Press the Yes key Box name setting Sets the name of synergy print box 1 Press the Box editting key 2 Select the desired box and press the Enter key 3 Select Box name and press the Change key 4 Enter the box name Press the Close key Press the End key oun Box password setting Sets the password for the synergy box 1 Press the Box editting key 2 Select the desired box 3 Select Password and press the Change
121. the Paper size settings 1st drawer cassette through 4th drawer cassette and then press the Change key 2 If you select Auto Detection automatic size detection here select the desired unit of measure Centimeter or Inch If you select Standard sizes standard paper size here simply press the key that corresponds to the size of paper that is loaded in that drawer Note The setting for drawer No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the auto sleep function automatically engages and puts the copier in the sleep mode if no operation has been performed on the copier during that time 1 Select Sleep mode changing time and then press the Change key 2 Press the keys to change the displayed time to the desired setting Setting range 1 5 15 30 45 60 90 120 180 240 minutes Auto low power time Sets the amount of time that will elapse before the auto low power function automatically engages and puts the copier in the low power mode if no operation has been performed on the copier during that time 1 Select Low power mode chng time and then press the Change key 2 Press the keys to change the displayed time to the desired setting Setting range 1 5 15 30 45 60 90 120 180 240 minutes Copy eject location Paper type drawer No 1 No 4 Sets the
122. the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC16 B4 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 17 Feed clutch 1 does not operate Broken feed clutch 1 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace feed clutch al Poor contact in feed clutch 1 connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC 11 14 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 18 Feed clutch 2 does not operate 1 5 48 Broken feed clutch 2 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace feed clutch 2 Poor contact in feed clutch 2 connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC13 A12 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB Problem Causes 2FD 2FF 2FG Check procedures corrective measures 19 Feed clutch 3 does not operate Broken feed clutch 3 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace feed clutch 3 Poor contact in feed clutch 3 connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable
123. the connector of the copier Seat the projection of the key counter cover retainer in the aperture in the middle right cover Fit the key counter cover with the key counter socket assembly inserted to the key counter cover retainer on the copier using the screw Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly Turn the main switch on and enter the maintenance mode Run maintenance item U204 and select KEY COUNTER Exit the maintenance mode Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key counter is pulled out Check that the counter counts up as copies are made 1 3 10 Projection Figure 1 3 13 Key counter cover retainer 66060022 Key conuter cover M4 x 30 screws B1304300 1 3 4 Installing the drawer heater option Drawer heater installation requires the following parts Drawer heater P N 34860030 for 120 V specifications Drawer heater P N 33960020 for 220 240 V specifications Band P N M2107120 Procedure 1 Remove thirteen screws and then the rear cover 2 Pull the upper and lower drawers out 3 Fit the drawer heater to the bottom of the machine and bind the wire of the drawer heater with the band 4 Put the wire of the drawer heater out of the machine through the aperture of the rear frame 5 Remove the four screws and the two connectors and then remove the wires from the
124. the output is controlled by the overvoltage detection circuit IC201 and the power MOSFET Q201 For 24 V DC output the PWM controller IC IC1 of the switching control circuit changes the duty of the switching pulse width of the power MOSFET Q1 via a photo coupler PC4 based on the output voltage status to adjust the 24 V DC output The 5 V DC output circuit smoothes the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diodes D101 and D102 and smoothing capacitors C101 and C102 and the output is controlled by the overvoltage detection circuit IC201 and the power MOSFET Q201 For 5 V DC output the PWM controller IC IC1 of the switching control circuit changes the duty of the switching pulse width of the power MOSFET Q1 via a photo coupler PC5 based on the output voltage status to adjust the 5 V DC output The overvoltage detection circuit C201 monitors the overvoltage status of 24 V DC and 5 V DC and when it detects an abnormal status it gives immediately feedback to the PWM controller IC IC1 via a photocoupler PC5 to stop control operation and moves the power source to a standby condition The fixing heater control circuit sends a waveform of which zero cross is detected to the main PCB MPCB which controls the timing of HEATER REM 1 and 2 based on it to turn on the phototriacs PC1 and PC2 When the phototriacs PC1 and PC2 turn on AC current flows through the triacs TRA1 and TRA to turn the fixing heaters M and S on 2 3 1 2F
125. the procedure below to replace the fixing heater M and S Procedure 1 Remove the fixing unit see page 1 6 36 2 Remove the upper fixing cover see page 1 6 36 3 Remove the screw on the front of the fixing unit thermostat and two screws on the rear of the fixing unit Fixing unit thermostat Screws Figure 1 6 71 4 Pull out the fixing heater M and S from the fixing unit Fixing heater S Figure 1 6 72 5 Replace the fixing heater M and S and refit all the removed parts Fixing heater M When refitting the fixing heaters take care not to refit fixing heaters M and S to wrong positions Refit fixing heater M black wire to the fixing unit housing with mark B and fixing heater S white wire to the housing with mark W Fixing heater S Figure 1 6 73 1 6 38 5 Detaching and refitting the heat roller Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller Procedure 1 2 3 Remove the fixing unit see page 1 6 36 Remove the upper fixing cover see page 1 6 36 Remove the press roller and fixing heater M and S see pages 1 6 37 and 38 Remove the fixing gear Detach the heat roller from the fixing unit Remove the C ring gear bearing and bushing on the rear of the heat roller and then remove the C ring bearing and bushing on the front Replace the heat roller
126. the touch panel 3 Press the start key The accumulated black ratio data is cleared and the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed 1 4 68 Checking clearing copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes Purpose To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts Method Press the start key The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed Clearing 1 Select the paper size The selected item is displayed in reverse To clear all counts press the reset key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared When clearing all counts the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U917 Setting backup data reading writing Description Stores backup data from the fax control PCB when an optional fax kit is installed into CompactFlash or reads the data from CompactFlash Purpose To store and write data when replacing the PCB Setting 1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug 2 Remove the middle right cover 3 Insert Compact Flash i
127. to be displayed on the touch panel 1 Press the Language key 2 Press the key that corresponds to the language to use Available languages Inch specifications Japanese English French and Spanish Metric specifications English German French Spanish and Italian 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 4 2 Maintenance mode The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine 1 Executing a maintenance item Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys Maintenance mode is entered Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys The maintenance item is selected Press the start key The selected maintenance item is run Press the stop clear key Repeat the same maintenance item Yes Run another maintenance item Enter 001 using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited and press the start key End 1 4 9 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 2 Maintenance mode item list Section Maintenance item contents use General Outputting an own status report Exiting the maintenance mode Setting the factory default data Setting the service telephone number Displaying the machine number Copying without paper Displaying the ROM checksum Displaying the ROM version Initialization Initializing all data Initializing counters and mode settings Initializing backup memory HDD formatting Drive
128. turning on Optional 3000 sheet finisher Jam between the finisher and copier The finisher does not respond 15 s after the eject signal is sent to the finisher Jam in paper entry sec tion See the 3000 sheet finisher service manual Jam in eject section of non sort tray See the 3000 sheet finisher service manual Jam in paper conveying section of internal tray See the 3000 sheet finisher service manual Jam in eject section of sort tray See the 3000 sheet finisher service manual 1 5 7 2FD 2FF 2FG Section Jam code Description Conditions Optional mailbox 85 Jam between the mailbox and copier The mailbox does not respond 15 s after the eject signal is sent to the mailbox 86 Jam in the mailbox 1 See the mailbox service manual 87 Jam in the mailbox 2 See the mailbox service manual 88 Jam in the mailbox 3 See the mailbox service manual 89 Jam in the mailbox 4 See the mailbox service manual Optional booklet 80 Entrance sensor delay jam See the booklet stitcher service manual stitcher 81 Entrance sensor stay jam See the booklet stitcher service manual 82 Early arrival jam See the booklet stitcher service manual 83 Folding position sensor delay jam See the booklet stitcher service manual 84 Folding position sensor conveying stay jam See the booklet stitche
129. used by the copy manager 1 Select Management code change Change MGMT code with and then press the Change key 2 Enter a new 4 digit management code using the numeric keys Auto sleep ON OFF Sets whether or not to have the auto sleep function automatically engage and put the copier in the sleep mode if no operation is performed on the copier for a designated amount of the time 1 Select Auto Sleep and then press the Change key 2 Select On or Off key Changing the energy saving mode Changes the energy saving mode that will be entered into when the energy saver key is pressed This setting is only available when the optional printer kit or printer scanner kit is installed 1 Select Energy Saver key setting and then press the Change key 2 Select Low power mode or Sleep mode key 2FD 2FF 2FG 5 Bypass setting Paper size and type Sets the paper size and paper type for the bypass settings When using special papers such as transparency cards and postcards be sure to set the paper type to prevent faulty transfer and faulty fixing T Press the key that corresponds to the size of paper to be used If to set the custom size press the Input size key Press the keys to change each of the displayed sizes length and width to the desired settings In metric specifications the desired sizes can also be entered directly by
130. 1 6 20 Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation 1 5 29 2FD 2FF 2FG Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Broken cleaning lamp wire While the cleaning lamp is on the bro ken cleaning lamp wire detection signal is detected for 2 s continuously Defective cleaning lamp Replace the cleaning lamp Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation Broken fixing heater wire When the power is turned on or at the start of fixing control from the sleep mode 10 s after fixing heater M is turned on the detected temperature of fixing thermistor 2 is lower than 40 C 104 F When the power is turned on or at the start of fixing control from the sleep mode 7 s after fixing heater S is turned on the detected temperature of fixing thermistor 1 is lower than 40 C 104 F During standby the detected temperatures of fixing thermistors 1 and 2 become lower than 60 C 140 F Poor contact in the fixing unit thermistor 1 or 2 connector terminals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Fixing unit ther mistor 1 or 2 installed incorrectly Check and reinstall if necessary Fixing unit ther mostat triggered Check for continuity If none replace the fixing unit thermostat
131. 15 2FD 2FF 2FG Periodic maintenance procedures Maintenance Section part location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Test copy and Perform at the maximum Test copy Every service test print copy size Maintenance part location Paper feed Upper lower paper feed Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Replace section pulley Upper lower separation Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Replace pulley Upper lower forwarding Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Replace pulley Bypass paper feed pulley Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Bypass separation pulley Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Bypass forwarding pulley Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Bypass feed roller 1 Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Bypass feed roller 2 Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol Left registration roller Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol Right registration roller Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol Feed pulley Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Replace Replace Replace Clean with alcohol Feed roller 1 Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol Feed roller 2 Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Feed roller 3 Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Registration switch Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Lower regist cleaner Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean
132. 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key The data for the optical section U060 to 067 U088 to 099 U403 U990 and U991 is initialized Method lnitializing the setting data for the network scanner 1 Press NETWORK SCANNER on the touch panel 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key The setting data of scanner function initial settings are initialized and the registered transmission and reception are cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 18 HDD formatting Description Formats the document management data HDD backup data areas for the network scanner and department administration Purpose To initialize the HDD when installing or replacing the HDD after shipping Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key to initialize the hard disk The EXECUTE display flashes during initializing Initialization results will be displayed when initializing is completed 4 Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Desc
133. 3 71 ee 1 3 33 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 9 Installing the Printing System option Cover Procedure 1 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover O Screws Oe E 2 Push the printing system all the way in along Printing system the rails and fasten it with 2 screws pd Figure 1 3 72 Screws N Figure 1 3 73 Install the optional network printer board 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover LE 4 Push the network printer board all the way in NC 1 along the rails and fasten it with 2 screws n Screws P Screws Cover Netwark pt 29 printer e board lo o SEET 9 ke 9 wee Ca 3 Figure 1 3 74 1 3 34 2FD 2FF 2FG Install the optional hard disk 5 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover LL d 6 Push the hard disk all the way in along the KR o 8 rails and fasten it with 2 screws 6 6 Hard desk Cover Screws Screws e Figure 1 3 75 is Installing the Optional Memory DIMM CO Option mermory NS C DIMM O OS 7 Remove the printing system and insert the optional memory DIMM firmly into either of the memory slots Push the DIMM firmly into y gt the slot so that the two hooks one hook at each end of the slot snap closed The board provides two DIMM slots and can accept up to two optional DIMMs
134. 3 Installing the Facsimile System option 1 3 48 1 3 14 Installing the hard disk option 1 3 56 1 3 15 Installing the 1000 sheet finisher option 1 3 58 1 3 16 Installing the 3000 sheet finisher option nennen 1 3 63 1 4 Maintenance Mode 1 471 Copier Managements cites amana sha e beat et E e i peste die ecd Ende 1 4 1 1 Using the copier management mode nennen nennen ener nn nnne 1 4 1 2 Setting department management items sse nennen nennen 1 4 2 3 Copy Ao CI aeepe cH 1 4 3 4 Machine default ipu otis hk a qumuq ER ee ep pesi hein ded See 1 4 6 5 Bypass Setting iit a eae ident eats Leader ete tede a e He deed 1 4 7 6 Original SiZ6 TEGiStratiOn a 3 5 iot ka luu a te ect teet C cot at t ete thes 1 4 7 7 User adjustment cee cere eee Bt a etie e eati gens de dee een gedd cn 1 4 8 8 Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report 1 4 8 9 Doucment management default seiting nenne 1 4 8 10 Hard disk Management Eegeregie ict cease cette no ne aqapana sepe RR eh YR ventas En 1 4 8 Tt Status report print EE 1 4 8 12 Language Selection Tupncon cece R Suasana nennen nennen nnne nnne snnt 1 4 8 1 4 2 Maintenance mode eiae not teet eit a ua d epo panei 1 4 9 1 Executing a maintenance Hem anan unahan a halaq nnns nnne chuqasqa sas 1 4 9 2 Maintenance mode item let 1 4 10 3 Contents of maintenance mode Hemes 1
135. 4 14 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 5 Troubleshooting 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 4 Paper misfeed detection u u m bel SLL edie uuu 1 5 1 1 Paper misfeed IMGICATION EE 1 5 1 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions ul u uU auaaasss sassa suka sassa nnne 1 5 2 3 Paper Imisfeeds ET 1 5 9 elle Tene 1 5 20 1 Self diagnostie function eterne eterna ciet reir Rant tne ttr cerner eere EEN 1 5 20 2 Self diagnostic CODES EE 1 5 21 Image formation problems AA 1 5 37 1 No image appears entirely white U u uuu 1 5 38 2 No image appears entirely black u u lu ull uuu uu uuu riiden sidagi adiada 1 5 39 3 Image IS too ght EE 1 5 40 4 Background IS visible u A ien ob ede trae rip Lena Euro SESS as iaa ARR a ele Taani Rea E cred 1 5 40 5 A white line appears longitudinally U u uu u 1 5 40 6 A black line appears longitudinally ll ull lll uu ll aaasassassssas meme 1 5 41 7 A black line appears laterally AANEREN sasa sassa aSaskasisssasass nnne 1 5 41 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the other 1 5 41 9 Black dots appear on the Image 1 5 42 10 Image ISIN D 1 5 42 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original 1 5 42 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original 1 5 43 13
136. 555 http www kyoceramita com Printed in Holland
137. 6 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC OPCB R SCAN7 signal OPCB R SCANG signal OPCB R SCANS signal OPCB R DIGKEY signal OPCB R DIGKEYS signal OPCB R DIGKEY7 signal OPCB R DIGKEY6 signal OPCB R DIGKEYS signal OPCB R DIGKEYA signal Connected to the printer board PRINTN O r a O a ose a Q O OO A O O O O O O O OO 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5V DG 5V DC 5V DC 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC Printer board PRINTN signal Ground Printer board SI signal Printer board SCLK signal Printer board SBSY signal Printer board SO signal Printer board RESET signal Printer board PDOUT signal Ground Printer board VDATAP signal Ground Printer board VDATAN signal Ground Printer board FPCLK signal Printer board FPDAT signal Ground Printer board VDATA signal Ground Ground Ground Printer board 5 V DC supply Printer board 5 V DC supply Printer board 5 V DC supply Printer board SDIR signal Printer board ESGIR signal Printer board VDFON signal Printer board VSREQN signal Ground Ground Ground Ground P
138. 6 Jam code 17 Misfeed inside conveying cover Misfeed in DP Jam code 18 Jam code 21 Jam code 22 Jam code 70 Jam code 71 Jam code 72 Jam code 73 Jam code 74 Jam code 75 Jam code 76 Misfeed in conveying cover Misfeed in built in finisher Jam code 30 Jam code 81 Jam code 35 Jam code 82 Jam codes 40 to 44 S Jam code 83 46 47 NN Jam code 84 Jam code 50 S 8 Jam code 51 Jam code 52 Jam code 60 Jam code 61 Misfeed in side cover Jam code 19 1 5 1 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions Built in finisher Uis ohne at DPFCL gege ES BYPFCL BYPPFC Paper feeder Large paper deck Figure 1 5 1 1 5 2 Section Jam code Description 2FD 2FF 2FG Conditions Paper feed section 10 No paper feed from the upper drawer Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within 841 ms of the upper paper feed clutch PFCL U turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within 841 ms No paper feed from the lower drawer Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn on within 882 ms of the lower paper feed clutch PFCL L turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within 882 ms No paper feed from large paper deck Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within 650
139. A NCU board assembly CTR NCU cable Name used in installation guide 3DB01010 3CM01030 3CM01040 3CM05010 3CM05040 3CM05030 76727300 B4103060 3CM27010 3CM27040 3B101030 3B101040 2AW27020 Part No Clamp Band Scanning System Name used in service manual Clamp CKN 05 Band Name used in installation guide M2105890 M2307010 Part No Sccaner board CD ROM scanner CD ROM document processing Sccaner board CD ROM scanner CD ROM document processing 3B301010 3B327010 3BJ27060 2 4 18 Built in finisher Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide 2FD 2FF 2FG Part No Large ejection cover Front ejection cover Rear ejection cover Flat spring ejection TP A chrome screw M3 x 05 TP A bronze screw M3 x 05 Job separator Name used in service manual Large ejection cover Front ejection cover Rear ejection cover Flat spring ejection TP A chrome screw M3 x 05 TP A bronze screw M3 x 05 Name used in installation guide 3B504020 3B504080 3B504090 3B502050 B4103050 B4303050 Part No Job separator tray Left front cover JS TP A bronze screw M3 x 05 Job separator tray Left front cover JS TP A bronze screw M3 x 05 3B620030 3B604010 B4303050 2 4 19 2FD 2FF 2FG
140. An original jam in the original feed section During the secondary original feed in the single sided original mode the original feed switch OFSW does not turn off within 1654 ms of the DP timing switch DPTSW turning on During original switchback operation in the double sided original mode the original feed switch OFSW remains on when the original switchback switch OSBSW turns off An original jam in the original conveying sec tion During the secondary original feed in the single sided or double sided original mode the DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn off within 2399 ms of turning on In the single sided or double sided original mode the DP timing switch DPTSW turns off within 474 ms of turning on 1 5 6 An original jam remaining after retries In the single sided or double sided original mode secondary original feed does not start after 5 retries Section Jam code Description 2FD 2FF 2FG Conditions Optional DP 75 An original jam in the switchback section 1 During the switchback operation of an original in the double sided original mode the original switchback switch OSBSW does not turn off within 7040 ms of turning on During the secondary original feed in the double sided origi nal mode the DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn on within 433 ms of the original conveying motor OCM turning on An original jam in the switchback section 2
141. BYPFSW does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 1123 ms of turning on Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within 841 ms of the upper paper feed clutch PFCL U turning on Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within a specified time of the lower paper feed clutch PFCL L turning on Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within a specified time of paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 turning on Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within a specified time of the desk upper paper feed clutch DPFCL U turning on The bypass feed switch BYPFSW does not turn off within 1730 ms of the bypass paper feed clutch BYPPFCL turning on Multiple sheets in copier vertical conveying sec tion Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within 1910 ms of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning off Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 FSW3 turning off Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within 1910 ms of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 FSW3 turning on Multiple sheets in bypass vertical conveying sec tion The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 1510 ms of the bypass feed switch BYPFSW turning off The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 1505 ms of the bypass feed switch BYPFSW turning on Paper con veying
142. C supply for DUPFCL DUPFCL ON OFF Ground DUPPCSW ON OFF 5 V DC supply from DUPPCSW Ground Duplex section connection signal Ground 24 V DC supply for CFM5 to 7 CFMB to 7 ON OFF Connected to the DM PFM FCL1 and FSW1 2 3 10 eo s m o OO bi R24V O OO DD DO i O O0 0 0 O 0 24 V DC 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 24 V DC 5V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DM Ground 5 V DC supply for DM Ground DM S S signal DM L D signal DM CLOCK signal 24 V DC supply for PFM Ground 5 V DC supply for PFM Ground PFM S S signal PFM L D signal FCL1 ON OFF Connector Pin No Voltage 2FD 2FF 2FG Description YC11 Connected to the DM PFM FCL1 and FSW1 O Ol6 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 24 V DC supply for FCL1 Ground FSW1 ON OFF 5 V DC supply for FSW1 YC12 Connected to the upper and lower paper size length switches O O 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PWSW U 24 V DC supply from PWSW U PWSW U paper width detection signal PWSW U paper width detection signal PWSW U paper width detection signal Ground 24 V DC supply for PWSW L 24 V DC supply from PWSW L PWSW L paper width detection signal PWSW L paper width detection signal PWSW L paper width detection signal Ground Connected to
143. CL turns on the bypass feed clutch BYPFCL turns on 275 ms after the bypass feed clutch BYPFCL turns on the bypass paper feed clutch BYPPFCL turns off 70 ms after the registration switch RSW turns on the bypass feed clutch BYPFCL turns off 48 ms after image ready signal turns on the registration clutch RCL turns on and the right registration roller rotates to start secondary paper feed 124 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch RSW off the registration clutch RCL turns off 8 b d e D 2 1 4 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 1 2 Main charging section The main charging section consists of the main charger assembly drum and so on The drum is electrically charged uniformly 500 pA by means of a grid to form a latent image on the surface The main charger unit charges the drum so that a latent image is formed on the surface the shield grid ensuring the charge is applied uniformly Main charger unit Tungsten wire Drum Shield grid HVTPCB ZENER PCB Figure 2 1 6 Main charging section block diagram 2 1 5 2FD 2FF 2FG Start key 100 ms DM MC REM b d 100 ms 515 ms e a EM 309 ms Timing chart 2 1 3 Main charging section operation 100 ms after the start key is pressed the drive motor DM turns on b 100 ms after the drive motor DM turns on main charging MC REM starts The lea
144. D 2FF 2FG 100V N PC105 YC2 T 2 PC104 L YC5 1 Wim i io NP IC205 eu cua Core mio 5 e 2 Jon C205 a Di 1Q102 s il ml L102 C109 ii Q205 o 2 L209 ral gor OE OS L210 e C11 Can C207 Te es e o Q212 e e o il pr 3 e G TB5 J SC 1 TH101 TB4 C i iL c EBC ai L SEN Ei o TB2 ul e LL 200V N PC105 YC2 A 5 or C YC5 S TR102 HPC pci RA IC205 TR101 5 A Jon E m a102 i SIE Q L209 L C110 E g a iS I DC e e I 9 L106 L205 Q210 Q212 e 5 i e b L207 e TB5 D S D101 7 TH101 HN iL Q216 zs E TEP i m TB1 TB3 Q101 EDOR Bids e 9 TB2 d C216 D YC7 C106 NS 2 3 2 Figure 2 3 2 Power source PCB silk screen diagram Connector Pin No Voltage 2FD 2FF 2FG Description TB TB1 Connected TB1 to the AC TB2 power plug IB2 and power TB3 relay TB3 TB4 TB4 TB5 TB5 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AG 220 240 V AC 120 V AG 220 240 V AC 120 V AG 220 240 V AC 120 V AG 220 240 V AC 120 V AC supply 220 240 V AC supply 120 V AC supply 220 240 V AC supply 120 V AC supply 220 240 V AC supply 120 V AC supply 220 240 V AC supply 120 V AC supply 220 240 V AC supply Connected to the 3000 sheet finisher or booklet stitcher o OO JO OQ G N
145. DIGLED6 signal Connected to the main PCB VEE OFF LCD D3 LCD D2 LCD D1 LCD DO LCD DISP OFF LCD VSS SG LCD VDD 5V LCD VSS SG LCD CP LCD LOAD LCD FRAME BUZZER 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC puls 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse LCD VEE signal LCD D3 data LCD D2 data LCD D1 data LCD DO data LCD DISPLAY signal LCD VSS signal LCD VDD signal LCD VSS signal LCD CP signal LCD LOAD signal LCD FRAME signal Touch panel detection voltage Y2 Touch panel detection voltage X2 Touch panel detection voltage Y1 Touch panel detection voltage X1 OPCB L BUZZER signal Connected to the main PCB DIGKEY4 DIGKEY5 DIGKEY6 DIGKEY7 DIGKEY8 DIGKEY9 SCAN5 SCAN6 SCAN7 SCAN8 DIGLED7 DIGLED8 5V S GND LAMP OFF R24V P GND S GND PH LED 000000 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse OPCB R DIGKEYA signal OPCB R DIGKEYS5 signal OPCB R DIGKEY6 signal OPCB R DIGKEY7 signal OPCB R DIGKEYS signal OPCB R DIGKEY signal OPCB R SCANS signal OPCB R SCANG signal OPCB R SCAN signal OPCB R SCANG signal OPCB R DIGLED7 signal OPCB R DIGLEDS signal 5 V DC supply
146. EOA MSdHS d vc8 UOIJ6 01 Ae L LL HO OL 6 8 ZEOA WS UOne1oJ DW 440 MSQO 340 MSdHS uonezi eniui jeuueos 1 0A MSdHS UOI 10J H GL LL HO 01 6 8 0A WS uoi eloJ Du NO MSQO dO MSdHS uonezijeniur jeuueogs vee d Z LE9A MSdHS UOI 610J H k LL HO 01 6 7 0A WS uoieloJ Du 440 MSQO NO MSdHS uonezijeniur jeuueos CZE MSdHS UORE OJ A6 8 cir HO OL6 8 LEOA WS UonEIO pm NO MSQO NO MSdHS uonezilellu jeuueos 2 4 2 uonezieniui iSuue9S 7 ON meya Huw 2FD 2FF 2FG d v6e0l UOI 10J ae HO uol e O1 pms jeuBls ONASAS CZE MSdHS Zh bE 01 6 8 7 0A WS 440 MSQO 00 oes uoneoyiuDeu jeurBuo Z x a L ev ue Duuueos d v6 01l UOI8 OJ A0 HO UoEIO DM teuis ONASAS CZE MSdHS Zh bE 01 6 8 7 60A WS NO MSQO 96001 oes uonevu bew feulBu0 x h L ew ue BuluueosS uone4edo Buiuueos jeulbluig ON Heyo Bulruur L 2 4 3 2FD 2FF 2FG FLA LI 1 10K Wau aa EE BEE _ Zv 60A MS4adA8 LLW 9LOA NS3 sw 60 ZW OLOA MSH B Yg LL8 910A Wa SW GLG UIN su 00 ED LOA WIH OW au ail LLW 90A 1O4dA8 sug z au ent 6V 90A 10JddA8 au 00Z 98 9104 10H ZL 0L LLOA Wad le LL 6 LLOA wa Kay uelis 3 D e o E D lt Jo3 3uo2 Ayisuap doo jenuew z one1 uone Heu ejqe1 ssedAq oy wo saded doo 2
147. F 2FG 4 Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit reference Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed lateral squareness not obtained Caution After adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit make a test copy and check the copy image If lateral squareness is still not obtained perform 6 Adjusting the position of the ISU see page 1 6 25 Procedure Enter maintenance mode Enter 993 using the numeric keys Press the start key EE Select PG2 NEM Press the interrupt key Press the start key and make a copy at 100 magnification Is the image correct exit maintenance mode Press the stop clear key to End 1 6 22 EE Correct image Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 6 44 Refit the laser scanner unit and turn the main switch on Turn the main switch off and carry out steps 1 to 6 of 3 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit see page 1 6 20 n case of copy sample 1 Loosen the screw in the direction of the white arrow gt Reduce the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the white arrow 5 gt n case of copy sample 2 Tighten the screw in the direction of the black arrow m Increase the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the black arrow wb See figure 1 6 45 l
148. FF 2FG Image ready Start key DM RCL FCL1 75 ms gt gt 22 ms PFCL U RSW FSW1 Timing chart 2 1 1 Paper feed from the upper drawer 8 100 ms after the start key is pressed the drive motor DM turns on to start the drive for the paper feed section At the same time the upper paper feed clutch PFCL U turns on and the forwarding and paper feed pulleys rotate to start primary paper feed b 75 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the feed switch 1 FSW1 on the feed clutch 1 FCL1 turns on and the feed roller 1 rotates 22 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch RSW on the upper paper feed clutch PFCL U and feed clutch 1 FCL1 turn off 8 48 ms after image ready signal turns on the registration clutch RCL turns on and the right registration roller rotates to start secondary paper feed 9 124 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch RSW off the registration clutch RCL turns off Image ready Start key DM RCL BYPPFCL BYPFCL RSW Timing chart 2 1 2 Paper feed from the bypass tray 100 ms after the start key is pressed the drive motor DM turns on to start the drive for the paper feed section 200 ms after the drive motor DM turns on the bypass paper feed clutch BYPPFCL turns on 105 ms after the bypass paper feed clutch BYPPF
149. FSSOL2 FSSOL1 R24V oooo s 5V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC supply for LED JOB FSSOL JOB release signal FSSOL JOB actuate signal 24 V DC supply for FSSOL JOB YC37 Connected to the scanner drive PCB and original detection switch GND SHPSW LAMP ON REM SM ENABLE SM RET SM CWB SM CLK SM M5 SM M4 SM M3 SM M2 SM M1 SM VREF ODSW GND OSDS 5V 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC Ground SHPSW ON OFF EL ON OFF SM ENABLE signal SM RET signal SM CWB signal SM CLOCK signal SM drive control signal M5 SM drive control signal M4 SM drive control signal M3 SM drive control signal M2 SM drive control signal M1 SM current control voltage Vref ODSW ON OFF Ground OSDS ON OFF 5 V DC supply for OSDS Connected to the left operation unit PCB DIGLED6 DIGLED5 DIGLED4 DIGLED3 DIGLED2 DIGLED1 SCAN4 SCANS SCAN2 SCAN1 DIGKEY3 DIGKEY2 DIGKEY1 O000000000 O O0O0OOOOOOOOOo 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC puls 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC OPCB L DIGLED6 signal OPCB L DIGLEDS signal OPCB L DIGLEDA signal OPCB L DIGLED3 signal OPCB L DIGLED 2 signal OPCB L DIGLED1 signal OPCB L SCAN4 signal OPCB L SCANS signal O
150. GND GND CCSW PFCL U UP24V LO24V PFCL L 24V RCL 5V HUMSENS GND ETTH EM B D EMB EM A D EMA DD OOOO OOOOOOO 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 5V DC DCO 5V 0to 5 V DC 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse FSSOL release signal FSSOL acutuate signal 24 V DC supply for FSSOL Ground FSSW ON OFF 5 V DC supply for FSSW Ground Not used 5 V DC supply Ground ESW ON OFF 5 V DC supply for ESW CFM1 ON OFF Ground Ground CCSW ON OFF PFCL U ON OFF 24 V DC supply for PFCL U 24 V DC supply for PFCL L PFCL L ON OFF 24 V DC supply for RCL RCL ON OFF 5 V DC supply for HUMSENS HUMSENS detection voltage Ground ETTH detection voltage EM coil energization pulse B EM coil energization pulse B EM coil energization pulse A EM coil energization pulse A Connected to the PSW total counter and key counter OO JP GQ N 24V MAIN SW OFF REM 24V TC REM K COUNT REM 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC supply for PSW PSW ON OFF 24 V DC supply for total counter Total counter signal Ground Key counter connection signal 24V DC supply for key counter Key counter count signal YC32 Connected to the DP Optional 2 3 12
151. ISK are recommended NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer be sure to format it in advance Procedure 1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug 2 Insert Compact Flash which has firmware in to the printer board 3 Insert the power plug and turn the power switch on Upgrading firmware starts 4 When upgrading the firmware is completed correctly the display in Figure 1 7 3 will be download end shown on the operation panel screen k 5 Turn the power switch off at the operation panel screen which shown on Figure 1 7 3 and disconnect the power plug 6 Remove Compact Flash from the printer board Caution If pressing the Reset button shown on Reset Figure 1 7 3 upgrading the firmware will start again and if turn the power switch off before the download is finished writing for the program will not finish till the end and Checksum error F010 will occur Figure 1 7 3 1 7 3 2 1 1 Paper feed section 2FD 2FF 2FG The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections Primary feed conveys paper from the upper drawer lower drawer or bypass tray to the left and right registration rollers at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing Each drawer consists of a lift driven by the lift motor and other components Each drawer can hold up to 500 sheets of
152. ITA EUROPE B V Hoeksteen 40 2132 MS Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 0 20 654 0000 Home page http www kyoceramita europe com Email info kyoceramita europe com KYOCERA MITA NEDERLAND B V Hoeksteen 40 2132 MS Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 0 20 587 7200 KYOCERA MITA UK LTD 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berks RG2 OBS UK Phone 44 0 118 931 1500 KYOCERA MITA ITALIA S P A Via Verdi 89 91 20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio Milano Italy Phone 39 02 92179 1 S A KYOCERA MITA BELGIUM N V Hermesstraat 8A 1930 Zaventem Belgium Phone 32 0 2 720 9270 KYOCERA MITA FRANCE S A Parc Les Algorlthmes Saint Aubin 91194 GIF SUR YVETTE France Phone 33 0 1 6985 2600 KYOCERA MITA ESPANA S A Edificio Kyocera Avda de Manacor N 2 Urb Parque Rozas 28290 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Phone 34 0 91 631 8392 KYOCERA MITA FINLAND OY Kirvesmiehenkatu 4 00810 Helsinki Finland Phone 358 0 9 4780 5200 KYOCERA MITA SCHWEIZ AG Industriestrasse 28 8604 Volketswil Switzerland Phone 41 0 1 908 4949 KYOCERA MITA DEUTSCHLAND GMBH Mollsfeld 12 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 0 2159 918 0 KYOCERA MITA GMBH AUSTRIA Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 A 1230 Wien Austria Phone 43 0 1 86338 401 KYOCERA MITA SVENSKA AB Vretenragen 2 6tr 171 54 Solna Sweden Phone 46 0 8 546 550 00 2005 KYOCERA MITA Corporation t KYOCERG is a trademark of Kyocera Corporatio
153. If installing a single DIMM you can use either slot Figure 1 3 76 1 3 35 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 10 Installing the Scanning System option Procedure 1 Remove 13 screws and take off the rear Rear cover Cover Figure 1 3 77 Printer system inti is installed e If the printing system is inst l 2 laka the 2 screws holding the printer nu ue 8890000000 o 88900000000 9900000005966 8 B999oooooooooooooo S9999ooooooooooooo SS89990900000000000 8990000000000000 99999o6oooooooooo 890809000000000 8999900000000000 890900000000 S8990000000000 89000000 890000000 89000000 S99990000000 S899900000000 S9990000000000 29 9909990000000 S999999990000000 amp 8999990000000000 8900000000 990000 9990000000069 9ooo00oooooococ 99999ooooocooooooo N Li E E gt o D E a o Ren 3 a o c o g Es a E g O gt o x gt o D Ki N Be 5 z3 o Figure 1 3 78 3 Remove 13 screws and take off the shield Cover Shield cover Screws Figure 1 3 79 1 3 36 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover 5 Firmly push connector CN1 on the scanner board all the way into connector YC46 on the main PCB 6 Fasten the scanner board with 2 screws 7 Fasten the shield cover into place with 13 screws 2FD 2FF 2FG Cover Ded E Screws
154. Ka Bypass forwarding pulley shaft Acutuator N 7 Figure 1 6 17 Bypass forwarding pulley shaft Bushing Figure 1 6 18 2FD 2FF 2FG 15 Remove the stop ring and slide the bypass forwarding pulley with the forwarding pulley Sie gu retainer from the shaft to remove it 16 Replace the bypass separation bypass paper b feed and bypass forwarding pulleys Bypass forwarding pulley Forwarding pulley retainer Figure 1 6 19 Bypass paper feed shaft 17 Refit all removed parts Fit the bypass unit cover so that the film on the cover is positioned under the bypass paper feed shaft Films Figure 1 6 20 1 6 9 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement Perform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches 3 1 Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original U066 U071 VS P 1 6 29 P 1 4 26 Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the above adjustments in maintenance mode Procedure Leading edge registration 50 1 mm Enter maintenance mode Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Enter 034 using the numeric keys Figure 1 6 21 Message display Press the start key DCL ON Leadin
155. Key counter retainer P N 66060030 Key counter cover retainer P N 66060022 Key counter mount P N 66060040 Key counter socket assembly P N 41529210 Four 4 M4 x 6 bronze TP A screws P N B4304060 Two 2 M4 x 10 bronze TP A screws P N B4304100 M4 x 20 bronze TP A screw P N B4304200 M4 x 6 chrome TP A screw P N B4104060 M3 x 8 bronze binding screw P N B1303080 M4 x 30 bronze binding screw P N B1304300 M3 x 6 bronze flat head screws P N B2303060 M3 bronze nut P N C2303000 Procedure 1 Fit the key counter socket assembly to the M4 x 6 screws B4304060 key counter retainer using the two screws and nut Key counter retainer 66060030 2 Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using the two screws and attach the key counter retainer to the mount using the M3 nut two screws C2303000 Key counter mount 66060040 it Key counter cover 2A360010 E Key counter socket assembly 41529210 M3 x 6 flat head screws B2303060 Figure 1 3 11 3 Remove the three screws holding the middle right cover and then the cover 4 Cut out the aperture plate on the middle right cover using nippers 5 Pass the connect inside the copier through the aperture and refit the middle right cover Figure 1 3 12 2FD 2FF 2FG 6 10 11 12 13 14 Pass the connector of the key counter through the aperture in the key counter retainer and insert into
156. Left cover 3 Mount the curl eliminator onto the left cover so that the projections at each end fits into Projection place 4 Fasten the curl eliminator into place with the two screws removed at step 2 Projection Curl eliminator Figure 1 3 151 5 Fasten the retainer to the left cover with the two M4 x 8 TP A chrome screws Retainer Fasten at the center of the oblong holes C Ui I 9 Left cover M4x8 TP A chrome screws Figure 1 3 152 1 3 63 2FD 2FF 2FG Mounting the finisher 1 Unscrew the two blue screws and remove the two metal fittings holding the rail unit to the finisher 2 Unscrew the transport fastening screw from the rail unit move it into the front screw hole and screw it in 3 Pull out the two fastening pins holding the waste punch box in place and take the waste punch box out of the finisher 1 3 64 Finner Rail unit Finisher Rail unit Transport fastening screw Figure 1 3 154 punch box Waste EF Fastening pins Figure 1 3 155 2FD 2FF 2FG 4 Remove the tape securing the solenoid and the tape securing the shifting guide Solenoid 5 Set the waste punch box back into the finisher and fasten it into place with the two fastening pins
157. M drive control voltage M5 SM drive control voltage M4 SM drive control voltage M3 SM drive control voltage M2 SM drive control voltage M1 SM current control voltage Vref ODSW ON OFF Connected to the scanner motor B 24V 0 24 V DC pulse 24 V DC 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 24 V DC 0 24 V DC pulse SM coil energization pulse _B 24 V DC supply for SM SM coil energization pulse B SM coil energization pulse A 24 V DC supply for SM SM SM coil energization pulse _A YC3 Connected to the inverter PCB LAMP ON LAMP ON 24V 24V GND GND i O O O O OOOOOO 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC EL ON OFF EL ON OFF 24 V DC supply for INPCB 24 V DC supply for INPCB Ground Ground YC4 Connected to the scanner home position switch 5V SHPSW GND O 5V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SHPSW SHPSW ON OFF Ground YC5 Connected to the original detection switch 5V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for ODSW ODSW ON OFF Ground YC6 Connected to the power source PCB 2 3 24 Ground 24 V DC supply form PSPCB Ground 5 V DC supply form PSPCB 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 3 5 CCD PCB CCD PCB Clock driver IC1 4 Differential receiver IC3 Main PCB Transistor Q2 Transistor Q1 Figure 2 3 10 CCD PCB block diagram The CCD PCB CCDPCB is equipped with a CCD sensor IC2 for original scanning
158. P is used Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U034 gt U066 U071 Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Change in value per step LEAD EDGE ADJ DP leading edge registration 32 to 32 0 0 19 mm TRAIL EDGE ADJ DP trailing edge registration 32 to 32 0 0 19 mm Increasing the setting moves the copy image backward and decreasing it moves the copy image forward 3 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Adjustment 1 In interrupt copy mode make a copy using the DP 2 Check the copy image and adjust the registration as follows For copy example 1 increase the setting of LEAD EDGE ADJ For copy example 2 decrease the setting of LEAD EDGE ADJ Display Description Setting range Initial setting Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 4 2 Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Adjusting the DP center line Descript
159. PCB L SCAN signal OPCB L SCAN1 signal OPCB L DIGKEY3 signal OPCB L DIGKEY signal OPCB L DIGKEY1 signal Connected to the left and right operation unit PCBs Optional 2 3 14 BUZZER LCD FRAME LCD LOAD LCD CP LCD VSS SG LCD VDD 5V LCD VSS SG LCD DISP OFF LCD Do LCD D1 LCD D2 LCD D3 VEE OFF P GND R24V LAMP OFF S GND 5V DIGLED8 DIGLED7 SCAN8 OOOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOo OOOO 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse OPCB L BUZZER signal Touch panel detection voltage X1 Touch panel detection voltage Y1 Touch panel detection voltage X2 Touch panel detection voltage Y2 LCD FRAME signal LCD LOAD signal LCD CP signal LCD VSS signal LCD VDD signal LCD VSS signal LCD DISPLAY signal LCD DO data LCD D1 data LCD D2 data LCD D3 data LCD VEE signal Ground 24 V DC supply for OPCB R OPCB R LAMP OFF signal Ground 5 V DC supply for OPCB R OPCB R DIGLEDS signal OPCB R DIGLED7 signal OPCB R SCANG signal Connector Signal Voltage 2FD 2FF 2FG Description YC42 Connected to the left and operation unit PCBs SCAN7 SCAN6 SCAN5 DIGKEY9 DIGKEY8 DIGKEY7 DIGKEY6 DIGKEY5 DIGKEY4 o000
160. PCB and the connector on the printer board Repair or replace if neces sary Defective main PCB or printer board Replace the main PCB or printer board and check for correct operation 1 5 21 2FD 2FF 2FG Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Scanner network board communi cation problem There is no reply after 20 retries at communication Poor contact in the connector ter minals Check the connection of connector YC46 on the main PCB and the connector on the memory PCB Repair or replace if neces sary Defective main PCB or scanner network board Replace the main PCB or scanner network board and check for correct operation Fax control PCB communication problem There is no reply after 20 retries at communication Poor contact in the connector ter minals Check the connection of connector YC44 on the main PCB and the connector on the memory PCB Repair or replace if neces sary Defective main PCB or fax control PCB Replace the main PCB or fax control PCB and check for correct operation Energy save communication problem Communication errors from the com munication microcomputer on the main PCB No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a commu nication error parity or checksum er ror is detected five times in succession Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and c
161. Paper creased Replace the paper 3 Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation 4 Flawed drum 16 Fixing is poor Causes 1 Wrong paper Causes Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit 2 Defective pressure springs 3 Flawed press roller 4 Defective fixing heater S Check procedures corrective measures 1 Wrong paper Check if the paper meets specifications 2 Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs 3 Flawed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 6 63 4 Defective fixing heater S 17 Image is out of Causes Replace the fixing heater S see page 1 6 63 focus 1 Defective image scanning unit Causes 2 Drum condensation Check procedures corrective measures 1 Defective image scanning unit Replace the image scanning unit see page 1 6 30 2 Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation 1 5 44 2FD 2FF 2FG 18 Image center does not Causes align with the original 1 Misadjusted center line of image printing center 2 Misadjusted scanner center line 3 Original placed incorrectly Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Misadjusted center line of image printing Readjust the center line of image printing see page 1 6 19 2 Misadjusted scanner center line Readjust the scanner
162. Select MODEO or MODE1 The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description MODEO To enable finisher initialization MODE1 To disable finisher initialization Initial setting MODEO 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Adjusting margins of image printing Adjustment See page 1 6 13 1 4 62 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjustment See page 1 6 31 Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP Purpose Used if margins are not correct when the optional DP is used Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U402 U403 gt U404 Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step A MARGIN Left margin 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm B MARGIN Leading edge margin
163. The clock signals CLK RS CLP and SHIFT for driving the CCD sensor IC2 are sent as differential signals from the main PCB MPCB reconstructed to normal signals by the differential receiver IC3 and then input to the CCD sensor IC2 via the clock driver IC1 and IC4 Image signals are analog signals Even and odd numbered pixels are output separately These analog image signals are amplified by emitter followers in the transistors Q1 and Q2 and then transmitted to the analog signal processing circuit in the main PCB MPCB 2 3 25 2FD 2FF 2FG IC4 o IC1 2 IC3 CN1 45 Connector Figure 2 3 11 CCD PCB silk screen diagram Voltage Description CN1 Connected to the main PCB OANOARWDY 2 3 26 yum ome sm p u O 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 5 1 V DC 12 V DC 4 5 V DC pulse 4 5 V DC pulse RS signal RS signal CLOCK signal CLOCK signal Ground SHIFT signal Ground CLP signal Ground 5 1 V DC supply from MPCB 12 V DC supply from MPCB EVEN signal analog Ground ODD signal analog Ground 2FD 2FF 2FG JeuBiu JO plu 6 G si Aypiuuny einjosqe eui pue AO JO 4 2 L Z O 00L SI uo Buiuuni yms urew 1e emgeet Hux ay UBM s 09 g JeuBiu 10 guj B S si Aupiunu lniosqe eui pue JaMO JO Z L2 9 00L S uo Buun yms urew y ye en
164. act between the heat roller and its separation claws is correct Repair if any springs are off the separation claws Check if the contact between the eject roller and pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary The feedshift solenoid malfunctions See page 1 5 49 Problem Causes check procedures 2FD 2FF 2FG Corrective measures 6 Paper jams Check if the duplex feed pulley upper duplex feed roller or lower duplex feed roller is deformed Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed 7 Toner drops on the pa per conveying path Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty Clean the developing unit 8 Abnormal noise is heard Check if the pulleys rollers and gears oper ate smoothly Grease the bearings and gears Check if the following electromagnetic clutches are installed correctly upper lower paper feed clutches feed clutches 1 2 3 bypass paper feed clutch and bypass feed clutch Correct 1 5 55 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 6 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1 Precautions Be sure to turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly When handling PCBs do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermost
165. al setting Printer leading edge margin 0 10 3 0 Printer left margin 3 4 10 2 8 Printer right margin 5 10 3 2 Printer trailing edge margin 5 10 4 4 Printer trailing edge margin for duplex copying second face 5 10 4 4 Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0 1 mm Proceed to another mode Press the stop clear key to exit maintenance mode Printer leading edge margin 6 2 5 mm C a Printer lt Printer left margin right margin 6 2 0 mm 6 2 0 mm Ejection direction reference a A Printer trailing edge margin Printer trailing edge margin 6 2 5 mm for duplex copying 6 2 5 mm Normal copy mode Duplex copy mode A3 11 x 17 second face A3 11 x 17 Figure 1 6 24 1 6 13 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 5 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper Make the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly or if the copy paper is Z folded Procedure Y Enter maintenance mode Y Figure 1 6 25 Enter 051 using the numeric keys Copy example 2 Original Copy example 1 Y Amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller DECK DATA Drawers Press the start key BYPASS DATA Bypass tray DUPLEX DATA Duplex copying second face Select RESIST DATA or FEED DATA Amount of slack in the paper at the paper f
166. an be cleared by turning the main switch off and then on If the error is detected continuously however perform the operation shown in Table 1 5 1 If a system error occurs frequently a fault may have occurred Check the details of the C call to take proper measures System error Contens Operation 0420 Large paper deck paper feeder System error Normal C call processing communication problem 0440 Finisher communication problem System error Normal C call processing 0450 Mailbox communication problem System error Normal C call processing 0470 Switchback unit communication problem System error Normal C call processing 0610 Bitmap problem System error Normal C call processing 0630 DMA problem System error Normal C call processing 0640 Hard disk drive problem System error Normal C call processing 3100 Scanner carriage problem System error Normal C call processing 4000 Polygon motor synchronization problem System error Normal C call processing 4010 Polygon motor steady state problem System error Normal C call processing Table 1 5 1 List of system errors Partial operation control If any of the following calls for service is detected partial operation control will be activated After taking measures against the cause of trouble run maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control C0420 Large paper deck paper feeder communication problem CO440 Fin
167. and refit all the removed parts Bearing Ground plate Bushing C ring 2FD 2FF 2FG Fixing gear Figure 1 6 74 C ring Bushing Heat roller Gear Figure 1 6 75 1 6 39 2FD 2FF 2FG 6 Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing unit thermistor 1 and 2 Procedure 1 Remove the fixing unit see page 1 6 36 2 Remove the upper fixing cover see page 1 6 36 3 Disconnect the connector of the fixing unit thermistor 1 4 Remove the heat roller see page 1 6 39 5 Remove the screw and disconnect the connector and then remove the fixing unit thermistor 2 6 Turn the fixing unit over and remove the screw to remove the fixing unit thermistor 1 1 6 40 Connector Figure 1 6 76 Connector Fixing unit thermistor 2 Figure 1 6 77 Fixing unit thermistor 1 9 Figure 1 6 78 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 7 Adjusting front position of the fixing unit adjusting lateral squareness Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fixing unit and therebre paper is not fed straight to the fixing section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer Procedure Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Place the original on the contact 9 Figure 1 6 79 glass Press the start key and make Tighten the two screws Refit t
168. ange 0 to 3 4 inch specifications 0 to 18 mm metric specifications Erased border width 2FD 2FF 2FG Determines the default value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes 1 Select Default erase width and then press the Change key 2 Press the keys to change the displayed widths to those desired Setting range Inch specifications Outside border 0 to 3 4 Center area 0 to 1 1 2 Metric specifications Outside border 0 to 18 mm Center area 0 to 36 mm Customize screen layout Add functions Copy limit Sets the limit for the number of copies or copy sets that can be made at a time 1 Select Preset limit and then press the Change key 2 Press the keys to change the copy limit to the desired setting Setting range 1 to 999 Repeat copying ON OFF Sets whether or not to prohibit repeat copying as well as whether or not to make repeat copying the default setting in the initial mode Note This setting is only available when the optional hard disk is installed in the copier 1 Select Modify Copy and then press the Change key 2 Select On or Off key Registration keys ON OFF Sets whether or not to allow a Register key to be displayed in the screen for those function and modes which can be registered under the registration keys Functions and or modes can only be regist
169. ange initial setting ADJUST DATA 39 39 4 Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0 17 mm ADJUST DATA2 39 39 18 Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0 084 mm 2FD 2FF 2FG 12 Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Perform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct U402 U404 P 1 6 13 Se P 1 4 63 Caution Before making the following adjustment ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode Procedure Enter maintenance mode Enter 403 using the numeric keys Press the start key Select the item to be adjusted A MARGIN scanner left margin B MARGIN scanner leading edge margin C MARGIN scanner right margin D MARGIN scanner trailing edge margin Press the interrupt key Press the start key to make a test copy Are the margins correct Proceed to another mode Press the stop clear key to exit maintenance mode End Press the start key The new setting is stored Change the setting Increasing the value using the cursor up key makes the margin wider Decreasing the value using the cursor down key makes the margin narrower Setting range default Scanner left margin 0 10 3 Scanner leading edge margin 0 10 3 Scanner right margin 0 10 1 5 Scanner trailing edge margin 0 10 1 Changing th
170. anually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken desk feed switch actuator Check visually and replace desk feed switch if its actuator is bro ken Defective desk feed Switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the desk main PCB check if CN2 7 on the desk main PCB remains low when the desk feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the desk feed Switch 13 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in by pass conveying sec tion Jam code 20 Broken bypass feed switch actuator Check visually and replace the bypass feed switch if its actuator is broken Defective bypass feed Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the bypass feed switch on and off manually Replace the bypass feed switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective registration Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on and off manually Replace the registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 14 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in copier pa per feed section Jam code 21 Optional Broken feed switch 1 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken
171. aper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex section The paper is then conveyed to the copier paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers D Feedshift guide 2 Upper duplex feed roller 8 Lower duplex feed roller Duplex feed pulley Duplex feed pulley Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW Figure 2 1 28 Duplex section OC DUPPCSW YC10 B4 DUPFCL YC10 B2 Figure 2 1 29 Duplex section block diagram 2 1 24 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 Paper conveying operation in duplex copying Paper of which copying onto the reverse side is complete is conveyed to the switchback section the eject motor switches from nomal rotation to reverse rotation to switch the eject roller to reverse rotation and the paper conveying direction is reversed Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the duplex section via the eject roller and the switchback roller Paper that has been conveyed to the duplex section is conveyed to the paper feed section again by rotation of the upper duplex feed roller and the lower duplex feed roller and copying onto the front sid
172. at Never substitute electric wires as the copier may be seriously damaged Use the following testers when measuring voltages Hioki 3200 Sanwa MD 180C Sanwa YX 360TR Beckman TECH300 Beckman DM45 Beckman 330 Beckman 3030 Beckman DM850 Fluke 8060A Arlec DMM1050 Arlec YF1030C Capable of measuring RMS values Prepare the following as test originals 1 NTC new test chart 2 NPTC newspaper test chart When replacing battery on a PCB dispose properly according to laws and regulations 1 6 1 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 Running a maintenance item Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys Enter the maintenance item TI number using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys Press the start key ee EM The selected maintenance item is run Press the stop clear key see Maintenance mode is entered SC The maintenance item is selected Repeat the same maintenance item Yes Run another maintenance item Enter 001 using the cursor f f up down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited and press the start key End 1 6 2 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 6 2 Paper feed section 1 Detaching and refitting the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Procedure Removing the primary paper feed units _ N ju 1 Open the front cover an
173. ating incorrectly Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Feed clutch paper feed clutch bypass paper Check the installation position and operation of the feed clutch feed clutch or registration clutch installed or paper feed clutch bypass paper feed clutch and registration clutch If operating incorrectly any of them operates incorrectly replace it 13 Paper creases Causes Paper curled Paper damp Defective pressure springs Defective separation Defective fans PON Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper curled Check the paper storage conditions Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Defective separation Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws Defective fans Replace the fans 14 Offset occurs Causes 1 Defective cleaning blade 2 Defective fixing section Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Defective cleaning blade Replace the cleaning blade see page 1 6 46 2 Defective fixing section Replace the heat roller and press roller 1 5 43 2FD 2FF 2FG 15 Image is partly miss Causes ing 1 Paper damp Paper creased Flawed drum 2 3 Drum condensation 4 Check procedures corrective measures 1 Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions 2
174. be paid to any forgotten connector trapped wire and missing Screws Uu sninn tseans saa A Daa AA ESA S A e Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the Q instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main switch on Always wash hands afterwards Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to S UCI ER ee Should smoke be seen coming from the copier remove the power plug from the wall outlet eg Lure 3 Miscellaneous AA WARNING Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol other than S the specified refiner it may generate toxic Oase uu u 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 CONTENTS 1 1 Specifications 1 1 1 SpecifiCatllons u ep eerte e awa a Pha eene eda ease uhu ka b teh 1 1 1 1 1 2 Parts names and their functions 1 eene enne nnne nennen nnns nennen 1 1 3 abeo RR n S m a umu aces uu uu a CT 1 1 3 2y Operation panel a tU HG aed S qulu a ia te ci
175. board 2 pin connector with green cable 2 pin connector FAX PCB Power cable Auxiliary power source PCB assembly Figure 1 3 119 YC44 YC1 WITT Fax cable Fax board YC1 Figure 1 3 120 1 3 51 2FD 2FF 2FG 17 Fasten the shield cover into place with 13 screws 18 Remove 1 screw and take off the modular cover 19 Hang the modular cover onto the holes on the controller box cover and fasten it into place with 1 screw 1 3 52 Shield cover 17 WES uy D Ss L Modular cover Figure 1 3 122 Modular cover Figure 1 3 123 2FD 2FF 2FG Printing system If the printing system was installed 20 Reinstall the printing system into the shield VEM s uo0000 999900000066 9999900000666 889900000000 cover fastening it into place with 2 screws Figure 1 3 124 21 Reattach the rear cover with 13 screws Rear cover Figure 1 3 125 c 2 o H F 836 o old JO D O bo o Too o c 2s Se St 5 o D o to EE eee 907 c O S SA Oar G too 835 o 520 o Gu Li oO Oo px Gos lt o e e Figure 1 3 126 1 3 53 2FD 2FF 2FG 23 Take the power label from the fax kit label sheet and adhere it to the copier directly under the p
176. cally select the same size of copy paper as the original once an original is set or whether the designated default drawer will be automatically selected 1 Select Select paper and then press the Change key 2 Select APS or Default drawer cassette key Paper type Auto paper selection mode Selects the types of paper that will be available for selection under the APS Auto Paper Selection mode 1 Select Select paper type APS and then press the Change key 2 Press the On key and then press the keys that correspond to the types of paper to allow to be used under the auto paper selection mode 1 4 3 2FD 2FF 2FG Default drawer Manual exposure adjustment text photo mode Sets one drawer that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer 1 Select Default drawer cassette and then press the Change key 2 Press the key that corresponds to the desired drawer cassette Settings 1st paper 2nd paper 3rd paper 4th paper The setting for drawer 3 and 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed Adjusts the median exposure value when the text photo mode is selected for the image quality 1 Select Manual exp adj Mixed and then press the Change key 2 Adjust the exposure using the Lighter key or the Darker key Setting range 3 to 3 Manua
177. ce the cable The rear side reg istration home po sition sensor mal functions Replace the rear side registration home position sensor and check for correct op eration Defective finisher main PCB Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation Finisher trailing edge registration motor problem built in finisher If the trailing edge registration home position sensor is on in initialization the sensor does not turn off within 570 ms of starting initialization If the trailing edge registration home position sensor is off in initialization the sensor does not turn on within 4550 ms of starting initialization The trailing edge registration motor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The trailing edge registration motor malfunctions Replace the trailing edge registration motor and check for correct operation The trailing edge registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The trailing edge registration home position sensor malfunctions Replace the trailing edge registration home position sensor and check for correct op eration Defective finisher main PCB Replace the finisher main PCB and check for cor
178. ce the scanner home position switch Defective main PCB or scanner drive PCB Replace the main PCB or scanner drive PCB and check for correct operation Defective scanner motor Replace the scanner motor Optional Contents 2FD 2FF 2FG Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Exposure lamp problem Non lighting of the exposure lamp is detected at the beginning of copying Poor contact of the connector ter minals Check the connection of connector YC34 on the main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PCB and check for correct operation Optical system problem After AGC correct input is not ob tained at CCD This code is not displayed The service call counter counts the frequency of occurrence only as for this code Poor contact of the connector ter minals Check the connection of connector YC34 on the main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PCB and check for correct operation Polygon motor synchronization problem When the polygo
179. center line see page 1 6 37 3 Original placed incorrectly Place the original correctly 19 Image is not Causes Square 1 Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly 2 Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly Adjust the installation position of the laser scanner unit see page 1 6 30 2 Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly Adjust the installation position of the image scanning unit see page 1 6 30 1 5 45 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 5 4 Electrical problems Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 The machine does not operate when the power switch is turned on No electricity at the power outlet Measure the input voltage The power cord is not plugged in properly Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet The front cover conveying cover and or side cover are is not closed com pletely Check the front cover conveying cover and side cover Broken power cord Check for continuity If none replace the cord Defective power switch Check for continuity across the contacts If none replace the power switch Blown fuse in the power source PCB Check for continuity If none remove the cause of blowing and replace the fuse Defective safety switch 1 or 2 Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch
180. changed by 10 s per step 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Setting the LDAP Description Enables or disables an LDAP server Purpose To change the setting to ON when use of an LDAP server is requested Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON LDAP server is enabled OFF LDAP server is disabled Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the enterprise mode Description Sets whether or not the enterprise mode setting is enabled if an optional network scanner is installed This maintenance mode is ef ctive for only 120 V specifications Purpose According to user request changes the setting Supplement It is not possible to turn setting simultaneously with U511 Setting scanTo FTP to ON Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is
181. charged magnetic toner With the single component developing system toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and charged when it passes through the magnetic doctor blade The toner that has passed through the magnetic doctor blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve is the nearest to the drum toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic pole Then when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum on the portion of the drum that has been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed On the other hand on the portion of the drum that has not been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed When toner comes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large an electric field disappears and toner does not leave the developing sleeve Development is complete Magnetic toner blade South pole ku Drum Ze North pole Developing sleeve Figure 2 1 18 Single component developing system 2 1 15 2FD 2FF 2FG Developing bias parameters For the bias to the developing sleeve an alternating current AC is applied Parameters for the developing bias are shown bel
182. cl E L 8NO L E MSdG eg e Gel i 8 o msaa 44 EJE No 8 6g wen K fs ki GNS t lt SJO cg LzerS9l86 08 rg swao ett EJO z d U so QNS iv eL Z lt a 8 i Z GND S NL w rE HO o zi Hi JOJdA8 oiv o gt ey S LINN NOLLWHLSISSY e S i DIS AS ley Oo zzao 1 E 25 il O Hf 6 JE lt TOdddA8 N S EE le od 6 CIS sb E d EIER EH d E HII SM ze 2 5 ZE 9 9 MSddA8 y NOLLdO A Waq TrO 3sr YY YY o i e S 4 vv Od H3MOd gnS z 2 E id v 8 GND Joe 2 WOU die AS iu EI 4e amp ma H 6 ZMSMddA8 i ZHL g L Z se S z OL INSMddA8 Jr M UND 2 6 D D ffe e L 8 o T L LL OMSMddAd eV lt SIJAT L tz 5 So S H ang 778 Et ix CE D BEER E CH 20 es Z2 MEI AIS cg bv S ae 2 2 zz a d e e old u A e 6 3665 fn 2G mI CIS AS 2 SV SOL CIS EI c tlele y 5 lt 9v QNO OF OF eng H 8 n 18 tJ z 5S Ap ae suns BE ax 8v od 121 HE u ele ZLE INOOMOd LL Lo 6Y lt SNL 9 9 a z e v m LUF HdSVi otis xz OLY CN5 gt S S o Hr t SIE OL S HE Jee SEZ bY NINNA i LE y Bs 6 9 Ee Log zo ZK ae Ind ASM I L ano 3 ju 8 IZ Rame e 9 Brk ely STI at L n z le P CCS SE mS 5 229 8 8 NS F x alas S 6 ae pen 2 1 Qr gt 28 3984NL z H8 gt z zz S Y sng lod Eg Le L D s an RI S m er EL 99A Hel ely 2 z E ZIEL NAGHOS vL I o P dm CTF 4100S a Ge OL OL a L 98 GND al rewa 5 z a ono 18 D 7 ziano S 6 SL Be OH ado e 88 vivda3 gt 9 9 az E
183. crew on the front side open the hook on the right side and remove the left front cover 4 Close the conveying cover and the front cover 5 Remove the two screws and remove the ejection cover with the mounting plate Left front 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 pin connector 2 pin connector cover Screws Figure 1 3 103 _ jll A dee uci Figure 1 3 104 1 8 45 2FD 2FF 2FG 6 Remove the two screws and then remove the inner ejection cover Inner ejection cover Es Figure 1 3 105 7 Insert the job separator into the copier from the front side and slide it to the left Secure the front side using a TP A bronze screw M3 x 05 and the rear side using a pin Check to see if the branch pressure lever on the rear side of the job separator has lowered TP A bronze screw Job separator Wem m Figure 1 3 106 1 3 46 2FD 2FF 2FG l ST Xe 8 Connect the connector of the job separator to the lower connector of the copier A sss HEED Connector of the copier p E Figure 1 3 107 9 Attach the job separator tray to the rail of the job separator by sliding it from the front side nsert the fitting section on the right side of the job separator t
184. ctuator is broken Problem Causes check procedures 2FD 2FF 2FG Corrective measures 11 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in copier vertical paper conveying section Jam code 18 Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken feed switch 3 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 3 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective registration Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Check if the feed pulleys and feed roller are de formed Check and repair if necessary 12 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in paper feeder verti cal conveying sec tion Jam code 19 Broken feed switch 3 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 3 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off m
185. d on to the copier will be the one for the copy operation mode or for the fax operation mode This setting is only available when the optional fax kit is installed 1 Select Select the main mode Select main mode and then press the Change key 2 Select Copy mode or FAX mode key Touch panel sound ON OFF Sets whether or not the touch panel will emit a beep sound each time a key is pressed 1 Select Key sound ON OFF and then press the Change key 2 Select On or Off key Silent mode ON OFF Sets whether or not to use the silent mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished 1 Select Silent mode and then press the Change key 2 Select On or Off key Day and time Sets the current date and time 1 Select Date Time and then press the Change key 2 Press the keys to change the displayed information for each field Year Month Day and Time to the current time and date Time difference Sets a designated time difference 1 Select Time difference and then press the Change key 2 Press the keys to change the displayed time difference to the desired setting Setting range 12 00 to 12 00 Changing the management code Changes the management code
186. d pull out the upper and lower drawers 2 Remove the one screw from each of the primary paper feed units and then the units Figure 1 6 1 Removing the forwarding pulley 3 Remove the stopper 4 Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the direction the arrow and remove from the Forwarding pulley primary paper feed unit retainer Figure 1 6 2 5 Remove the stop ring pull the forwarding Stop ring Forwarding pulley shaft pulley shaft in the direction of the arrow and remove the forwarding pulley Forwarding pulley Figure 1 6 3 2FD 2FF 2FG Removing the paper feed pulley 6 Remove the two stop rings 7 Pull the paper feed shaft toward the rear of the primary paper feed unit in the direction of the arrow and remove the paper feed pulley Removing the separation pulley 8 Remove the stop ring on the rear of the primary paper feed unit 9 Pull the separation shaft toward the machine rear in the direction of the arrow and remove the separation pulley 10 Replace the forwarding paper feed and Separation pulleys Caution When fitting the forwarding pulley orient it correctly as shown in Figure 1 6 6 When fitting the separation pulley keep the blue end of the separation toward the machine rear 11 Refit all removed parts 1 6 4 Paper feed shaft Stop rings Paper feed pulley Figure 1
187. diagram The scanner drive PCB SDPCB consists of a stepping motor driver IC IC1 as the center digital transistors DT1 and DT2 etc Drive of the scanner motor SM is controlled by the current setting voltage SM Vref that is output from the main PCB MPCB the mode signals SM M1 to M5 SM CWB the phase switchover clock signal SM CLK and the drive stop signal SM ENABLE Also the main PCB MPCB outputs a control signal EL through a digital transistor DT2 to the inverter PCB INPCB to turn on or off the exposure lamp EL Also the scanner drive PCB SDPCB acts as an interchange circuit of signals for the original detection switch ODSW and the scanner home position switch SHPSW 2 3 22 YC4 YC6 A YC1 14 4 1 E o 38 U1 22 1 YC3 1 5 o2 ECB 5 6 Figure 2 3 9 Scanner drive motor PCB silk screen diagram 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 YC2 6 1 YC53 2 3 23 2FD 2FF 2FG Connector Signal Voltage Description YC1 Connected to the main PCB OANDAKRWON GND SHPSW LAMP ON REM SM ENABLE SM RET SM CWB SM CLK SM M5 SM M4 SM M3 SM M2 SM M1 SM VREF ODSW O 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Ground SHPSW ON OFF EL ON OFF SM ENABLE signal SM RET signal SM CWB signal SM CLOCK signal S
188. ding edge of the paper turns on the eject switch ESW and at the same time the eject motor EM turns on 309 ms after the paper is ejected and the eject switch ESW turns off main charging MC REM ends e 515 ms after the end of main charging MC REM the eject motor EM turns off 2 1 6 2 1 3 Optical section 2FD 2FF 2FG The optical section consists of the scanner mirror frame and image scanning unit for scanning and the laser scanner unit for printing i jt H Figure 2 1 7 Optical section CD Mirror 1 frame 2 Mirror 2 frame 3 Exposure lamp EL Mirror 1 5 Mirror 2 6 Mirror 3 Lens 8 CCD PCB CCDPCB 9 Image scanning unit Laser scanner unit LSU Scanner motor SM Scanner home position switch SHPSW 2 1 7 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 Original scanning The original image is illuminated by
189. dirty with paper pow der Clean with isopropyl alcohol Electrical problem with the registration clutch See page 1 5 49 9 Skewed paper feed Width guide in a drawer installed incorrectly Check the width guide visually and correct or replace if necessary Deformed width guide in a drawer Repair or replace if necessary Check if a pressure spring along the paper conveying path is deformed or out of place Repair or replace 4 The scanner does not travel Check if the scanner wire is loose Reinstall the scanner wire see page 1 6 16 The scanner motor malfunctions See page 1 5 47 5 Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time Check if the upper or lower separation pulley is worn Replace the upper or lower separation pul ley if it is worn see page 1 6 3 Check if the paper is curled Change the paper 6 Paper jams 1 5 54 Check if the paper is excessively curled Change the paper Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Repair or replace if necessary Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the contact between the feed roller and feed pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed Clean or replace the press roller Check if the cont
190. displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key All copy counts and machine lie counts are cleared Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count press the stop clear ky The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts Purpose To check the machine life counts Method Press the start key The current machine life counts is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the default magnification ratio of the default drawer Description Sets the default magnification ratio when paper selection of copy default setting is set to the default drawer Purpose According to user request changes the setting Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select 100 or AMS The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description 100 100 magnification ratio AMS Automatical magnification ratio Initial setting 100 magnification ratio 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 71 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 72 Description Set
191. during copying jam in large paper deck horizontal paper conveying section Jam code 15 Paper in the large paper deck is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace Defective paper path sen sor 3 With 5 V DC present at CN6 12 on the deck main PCB check if CN6 11 on the deck main PCB remains low when paper path sensor 3 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sen sor 3 Check if paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feed clutch 2 on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with pa per feed clutch 2 Check 9 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in large paper deck horizontal paper conveying section Jam code 16 Paper in the large paper deck is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace Defective paper path sen sor 2 With 5 V DC present at CN6 9 on the deck main PCB check if CN6 8 on the deck main PCB remains low when paper path sensor 2 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sen sor 2 Check if paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feed clutch 1 on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy i
192. e If none remedy or replace the cable Defective upper paper switch Check if YC13 B12 on the main PCB goes low when the upper paper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at YC13 B13 on the main PCB If not replace the upper paper switch 38 The message re questing paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the lower drawer Poor contact in the lower paper switch connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective lower paper switch Check if YC13 B18 on the main PCB goes low when the upper paper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at YC13 B19 on the main PCB If not replace the lower paper switch 39 The message re questing paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the by pass tray Poor contact in the bypass paper switch connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective bypass paper switch Check if YC6 A6 on the main PCB goes low when the bypass paper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at YC6 A5 on the main PCB If not replace the bypass paper switch 1 5 51 2FD 2FF 2FG Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 40 The size of paper in the upper drawer is not displayed correctly Poor contact in the upper pape
193. e conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 11 x 81 2 size The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4 11 x 81 2 size and to display the result in user simulation Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 11 x 81 2 size for copy mode printer mode and fax mode respectively Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select copier mode COPY printer mode PRT or fax mode FAX 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting COPY PRT FAX Size parameter for copier mode Size parameter for printer mode Size parameter for fax mode 0 1 to 3 0 0 1 to 3 0 0 1 to 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 3 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output only if a printer kit is installed Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output Method 1 Press the start key
194. e following settings can be made Paper feed locations Magnifications Simplex or duplex copy mode Number of copies in simplex copy mode continuous copying is performed when set to 999 in duplex copy mode continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting Copy density Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver preheat key To control the paper feed pulley remove all the paper in the drawers or the drawers With the paper present the paper feed pulley does not operate Press the start key The operation starts Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions When operation is complete the screen for selecting an item is displayed To stop continuous operation press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 16 Displaying the ROM checksum Description Displays the checksum of ROM Purpose To check the checksum Method 1 2 Press the start key Program names for the copier is displayed Press the start key The ROM checksum is displayed Display Description MAIN Main PCB ROM checksum MMI Operation PCB ROM checksum LANGUAGE Stand Standard language ROM checksum LANGUAGE Option Optional language ROM checksum Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed
195. e is performed Eject roller Switchback roller Eject roller Eject roller Upper duplex feed roller Lower duplex feed roller Copying onto reverse side Switchback operation Copying onto front side normal rotation of eject motor reverse rotation of eject motor normal rotation of eject motor n Paper path Figure 2 1 30 2 1 25 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout 1 PCBs on O OO JO Om Power source PCB PSPCB High voltage transformer PCB
196. e screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Displays the cleaning guidance OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance Initial setting ON 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Side ejection setting Description Sets whether to eject to the side of the machine when an optional cur eliminator is installed Purpose Set according to the pretrence of the user Method 1 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON To eject to the side of the machine OFF Not to eject to the side of the machine 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ky The screen for selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation Description When sort copying is set to perform automatically in the output brm setting of the user simulation sets the number of sheets at which the eject location is switched to the optional finisher only when the finisher is
197. e sided original ADP NON P Without paper single sided original continuous operation RADP NON P Without paper double sided original continuous operation 4 Press the start key The operation starts 5 To stop continuous operation press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key when the operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 44 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the optional counter to be installed using the cursor up down keys The selected counter is displayed in reverse Display Description KEY CARD The key card is installed KEY COUNTER The key counter is installed 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender Also sets the details for co
198. e start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for adjustment The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 29 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No U089 Outputting a MIP PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP PG pattern created in the copier Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non scanned output MIP PG pattern Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the MIP PG pattern to be output Description Display PG pattern to be output Purpose GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit j engine output characteristics iz LU MONO LEVEL To check the drum quality 256 LEVEL To check resolution reproducibility in printing p 1 DOT LINE To check fine line reproducibility To adjust the position of the laser scanner unit lateral squareness 3 To change the output conditions of MONO LEVEL and 1dot LINE use the cursor up down keys to change the preset values and press the Start key to register the setting Display Setting range Initial setting Output density of MONO LEVEL 0 or 70 0 1dot LINE 0 to 21 0 4 Press the inte
199. e the or key to set 0 100 V system fixing heater phase control or 1 200 V system fixing heater phase control 3 Press the start key The value is set and the maintenance mode is eited Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current value press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the fixing temperature Description Displays the fixing temperature the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity Purpose To check the fixing temperature the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity Method Press the start key The fixing temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade C and the absolute humidity is displayed in percentage Display Description FIX TEMP Fixing temperature C SURROUND TEMP Ambient temperature C HUMIDITY Absolute humidity 96 Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U200 Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light Method Press the start key All the LEDs on the operation panel light Press the stop clear key or wait for 10 s The LEDs turns off and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Initializing the touch panel Description
200. e the density Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting ADJUST DATA Type of the laser scanner unit 0to 3 2 LASER POWER Laser scanner unit output power O to 1 0 30 cpm 1 40 50 cpm The setting of LASER POWER is changed into 1 from 0 the output power of LSU is go up and half tone is come to come out darkly 3 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed 1 4 57 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 58 Description Setting auto application change time Description Sets the time that passes until the machine starts automatically printing after completing copying or operatio when the machine is used as a printer or fax only if the printer kit or fax kit is installed Purpose According to user request changes the setting Method Press the start key The current setting is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Switching time 30 to 270 s 30 The setting can be changed by 30 s
201. e two screws on the left side to secure the cover with the copier secure the front side using the screw that has been removed in step 3 and secure the right side using a TP A chrome screw M3 x 05 18 Close the conveying cover and the front cover Attach the front ejection cover and the rear ejection cover using a TP A chrome screw M3 x 05 each 2FD 2FF 2FG Large ejection cover Figure 1 3 97 TP A chrome screw M3 x 05 Figure 1 3 98 TP A chrome screw M3 x 05 a Rear eje TP A chrome TT M3 x 05 Figure 1 3 99 1 3 43 2FD 2FF 2FG 19 Attach the copy tray Copy tray Figure 1 3 100 20 Open the staple cover and insert the staple EE cartridge into the stapler m at 21 Close the staple cover p Dom Staple cover gt Se 22 Insert the power plug of the copier into an Mau Ar outlet and turn the power switch on SER tt 23 Select the staple mode and make a stapled copy to check that stapling is performed properly SS Figure 1 3 101 1 3 44 1 3 12 Installing the job separator option Preparation 1 Insert the LED PCB into the job separator and connect the 2 pin connector of the LED PCB into the 2 pin connector of the job separator Arrange the wire into the two grooves of the job separator 2 Open the conveying cover and the front cover 3 Loosen the two left screws on the left side remove the s
202. e value by one moves the margin by 0 1 mm for all Scanner leading edge margin 3 1 5 mm Ejection direction A reference Scanner re ris Scanner left margin right margin 2 1 0 mm 2 1 0 mm Scanner trailing edge margin 2 1 0 mm Figure 1 6 58 1 6 31 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 6 4 Drum section 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit Cautions Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit Procedure 1 Open the conveying cover and remove the developing unit see page 1 6 34 2 Remove the screws holding the drum unit and then the unit 3 Replace the drum unit and refit all the removed parts 2 Detaching and refitting the main charger unit Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover 2 Pull out the main charger unit holding the knob 3 While pushing the hole with a sharp pointed object remove the main charger unit 4 Replace the main charger unit and refit all the removed parts 1 6 32 Drum unit Figure 1 6 59 Hole Knob Main charger unit Figure 1 6 60 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw assemblies Follow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claw assemblies Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit see
203. eat source halogen heaters 120 V specifications main 600 W sub 500 W 220 240 V specifications main 640W sub 534 W Control temperature 175 C 347 F at normal ambient temperature 50 cpm copier 170 C 338 F at normal ambient temperature 40 cpm copier 165 C 329 F at normal ambient temperature 30 cpm copier Abnormally high temperature protection device 170 C 338 F thermostat Fixing pressure 107 8 N Exposure by cleaning lamp Cleaning blade and roller Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor 27 MB standard 37 MB standard 600 x 600 dpi Inert gas lamp 585 W x 646 D x 745 H mm 23 W x 252 5 D x 291 3 H Approx 82 kg 165 lbs 1512 W x 646 D mm 591 2 W x 252 5 D Auto paper selection mode Image quality selection Auto magnification selection mode Zoom mode Preset zoom mode XY zoom mode 2 sided copy modes Page separation Split copy modes Margin mode Centering Image shift mode Memo mode Border erase modes Combine Merge Copy modes Print page numbers mode Form overlay mode Booklet Stitching mode Book to Booklet mode Sort Finished mode Auto rotation function Cover mode Transparency backing sheet mode Invert mode Mirror image mode Proof mode Repeat copy mode Batch scanning mode Eco print mode Program function Job build mode Form registration Shared data box Synergy print boxes Copy management mode Language selection function Requires the optional hard disk 120
204. ect switch JBESW does not turn off within 2050 ms of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on Feedshift section Misfeed in feedshift sec tion The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 873 ms of the start of eject motor EM reverse rotation During paper switchback operation the feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 317 ms of turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within 2898 ms of the registration switch RSW turning off The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within 2898 ms of the registration clutch RCL turning on Optional switchback unit Misfeed in switchback section The switchback eject switch SBESW does not turn off within 1421 ms 2797 ms of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on The switchback eject switch SBESW does not turn on within 1421 ms 2797 ms of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 1 5 5 2FD 2FF 2FG Section Jam code Description Conditions Optional switchback unit 53 Misfeed in switchback section The switchback eject switch SBESW does not turn off within 1421 ms 2797 ms of the feedshift switch FSSW turning off Duplex section Duplex paper conveying section 1 The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does not turn on within 1285 ms of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing on The duplex pape
205. ective main PCB Check if YC7 4 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the main PCB Defective high voltage transformer PCB Check if main charging takes place when CN1 3 on the high voltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the high voltage transformer PCB Exposure lamp fails to light The connector terminals of the exposure lamp make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective inverter PCB Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN1 1 and 1 2 on the inverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run If not replace the inverter PCB Defective scanner drive PCB Check if the exposure lamp lights when YC1 3 on the scanner drive PCB goes low while maintenance item UO61 is run If not replace the scanner drive PCB Defective main PCB Check if YC37 3 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance item U061 is run If not replace the main PCB 1 5 39 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Image is too Causes light 1 Insufficient toner 2 Deteriorated toner 3 The transfer voltage is not output properly 4 Dirty main charger wire Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Insufficient toner If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment replace the cartridge 2 Deteriorated toner
206. ed yoga Jo uomnisod eui sisnipy seounos Jaded 18u o 104 seui 49 U99 y jo 1ueuujsn pe out u 92U9J9J01 BY se pesn si e qej ssed q eu Jo eui 191u82 eu uj lned 188 cov uj lned 188 cov weed 188 vEON weed 188 veon uj led 188 veon 1NONSI Buju pue uoneutunii NST Buug ueis uoneulunil NST Buiun pes pee jeded Kiepuooes Dun uo Buluan uoinp uoneJisibeu Jejsn pe 3981 ay jo uonisod eui Bunsn py Buluun pes Jud 181 eui Bunsn py u uusn pe Bunuud uiBjeu eBpe Bule y Bunsn py 1ueunsnfpe Bunuud urew ape Buipee eui Bunsn py Qu w jsnfpe Bunuud uoiedsi 6 1 oDpe Buipee eui Bunsn py ueuusnfpe Bunuud yoop Jeded abe pue siamesp eui JO eui 191060 y Bunsn py u unsn pe Bunuud ap ssed q eui JO eui 49 U99 Bu Bunsn py uj l led 1se1 SON YOLOW NIV juawjsnipe peeds 10jou eAuq jueuusnfpe Gunuud uonoei p Buiuueos Agang y u uoneoyiuBDeui y Buysnipy usayed 1se1 eson HOLON NOSA10d juawjsnipe p ds Jojow uoB od jueuusnfpe Gunuud uono u p Buiuueos urew y u uoneouyiuBeui y Bunsn py eyo 1s9 ZDd 66N jusujsnipe Bunuud yun Jeuueos Jase eui JO Mays y amp unsn py t u unsn pe Bunuud seau e1enbs e1eje eui Bunsnfpy syieway jeuibuo Spo ON Wa
207. ed switch 1 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace feed switch 1 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective registration switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on and off manually Replace the registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 19 A paper jam in the fixing section is indi cated during copy ing jam in fixing section Jam codes 40 to 44 46 and 47 Broken eject switch actua tor Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is bro ken Defective eject switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and off manually Replace the eject switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Broken feedshift switch actuator Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is broken Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 1 5 15 2FD 2FF 2FG Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 19 A paper jam in the fixing sectio
208. eed roller BYPASS Bypass tray 1ST DECK Upper drawer Y 2ND DECK Lower drawer Select the item Y to be adjusted Y Press the interrupt key Press the to make a start key test copy 3RD DECK Optional drawer 1 4TH DECK Optional drawer 2 LCF Optional large paper deck Press the start key The new setting is stored Y Is the leading edge of the image missing or varying randomly copy example 1 Increase the value using the cursor up key Is the copy paper Z folded copy example 2 Yes F Decrease the value using the cursor down key Setting range initial setting Amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller DECK DATA 30 20 0 BYPASS DATA 30 20 0 DUPLEX DATA 30 20 0 Press the stop clear key to exit maintenance mode Amount of slack in the paper at the paper feed roller BYPASS 0 255 0 1ST DECK 0 255 20 2ND DECK 0 255 0 End 3RD DECK 0 255 0 4TH DECK 0 255 0 LCF 0 255 0 The greater the value the larger the amount of slack the smaller the value the smaller the amount of slack 1 6 14 1 6 3 Optical section 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp as follows Procedure 1 Remove the original cover or the DP 2 Remove the upper right cover upper front cover upper rear cover and contact g
209. electing a maintenance item Na is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations Purpose To check the time to replace consumate parts Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumalle parts Method 1 Press the start key The counts by paper feed locations are displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys Display Paper feed locations BYPASS Bypass tray FIRST Upper drawer SECOND Lower drawer THIRD Optional drawer 1 FORTH Optional drawer 2 LCF Optional large paper deck DUPLEX Duplex section When an optional paper feed device is not installed the corresponding count is not displayed Clearing 1 Select the count to be cleared The selected item is displayed in reverse To clear the counts for all paper feed locations press the reset key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 65 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 66 Description Checking clearing finisher punch count Description Sets the punch limit and displays and clears the punch hole scrap count when the optional 3000 she
210. electing an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 67 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U906 Resetting partial operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections and the related parts are serviced Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key to reset partial operation control The maintenance mode is exited and the machine returns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on Changing the total counter value Description Displays the total counter value Purpose To check the total counter value Method Press the start key Setting 1 Select the count to be changed 2 Enter a six digit value using the numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current total counter value press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Clearing the black ratio data Description Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheets Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press CANCEL on
211. eloping unit Method Press the start key The developing count is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 39 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 40 Description Setting the fixing control temperature Description Changes the fixing control temperature Purpose Normally no change is necessary However can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper or solve a fixing problem on thick paper Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item to be set and press the statt key The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description CONTROL TEMP Sets the fixing control temperature CORRECT TEMP Sets the fixing correct temperature Setting the fixing control temperature 1 Select the item to be set The selecting item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting CONT TEMP Control temperature during copying 100 to 200 C 130 1ST TEMP Primary stabilization fixing 80 to 200 C 115 30 cpm temperature 120 40 50 cpm 2ND TEMP Secondary stabilization fixing 100 to 200 C 130 30 cpm temperature 145 40 50 cpm WARM UP TIM S Time from power on to stabilization of fixing 5 to 20 0 DUP DOWN TEMP1 Fixing temperature decrease amount Oto 20 C 5 for duplex copyi
212. emedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC16 B6 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 23 The duplex feed clutch does not operate Broken duplex feed clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the duplex feed clutch Poor contact of the duplex feed clutch connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC10 B2 on the copier main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 24 The feedshift sole noid does not oper ate Broken feedshift solenoid coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the feedshift solenoid Poor contact in the feedshift solenoid connec tor terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U033 and check if YC16 A1 and YC16 A2 on the main PCB go low If not replace the main PCB 1 5 49 2FD 2FF 2FG Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 25 The toner feed sole noid does not operate Broken toner feed solenoid coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the toner feed solenoid Poor contact in the toner feed solenoid
213. enance item U243 and select the original conveying motor on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary 31 An original jams in the DP is indicated during copying a jam in the original switchback section 2 Jam code 76 Optional 1 5 18 Defective original switch back switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Problem Causes check procedures 2FD 2FF 2FG Corrective measures 32 Paper jams in the built in finisher dur ing copying intake jam Jam code 82 Defective paper conveying switch With 5 V DC present at CN4 9 on the finisher main PCB check if CN4 10 on the finisher main PCB remains high or low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it does re place the paper conveying switch Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is de formed Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed 33 Paper jams in the built in finisher dur ing copying jam during paper con veying for batch ejection 1 Jam code 83 Defective paper conveying switch With 5 V DC present at CN4 9 on the finisher main PCB check if CN4 10 on the finisher main PCB remains high or low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it d
214. enance item without executing initialization press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Initializing counters and mode settings Description Initializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines i e settings for counters service call history and mode settings As a result initializes the backup RAM according to the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252 Purpose Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 447 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U022 Initializing backup memory Description Initializes only the data set for the optical section or initializes various setting data when installing the optional network scanner board Purpose To be executed after replacing the scanner unit or installing the network scanner board Start Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed Method lnitializing the data for the optical section 1 Press SCANNER on the touch panel
215. er and detects abnormalities via XIO U14 U15 and U22 The operation unit CPU U26 operates on an 32 bit bus It uses the SRAM U25 for work memory In accordance with the control program in the main CPU FLASH U29 which also contains LCD display fonts the operation unit CPU U26 controls key switches and LEDs on the operation unit PCB OPCB and controls the LCD display via the LCD controller U24 2 3 6 2FD 2FF 2FG Figure 2 3 4 Main PCB silk screen diagram YC34 YC37 YC32 YC33 YC41 YC38 CI YC46 YC51 ing YC42 e LO U26 IL je i U47 u52 3 as U34 J U51 t U5 oo gd o Ux U28 U29 U38 U35 U41 Du E U43 g U40 U37 U42 9 s A J 1 U4 IE U25 u65 U64 U39 u20 U33 U100 al Uae YC49 U12 S YC44 YC50 uo yous Ed U15 U18 U24 U44 coo T sts O U16 22 9 zi U45
216. ered under registration keys through the Register key 1 Select Display register key Display Register key and then press the Change key 2 Select On or Off key Customize screen layout Main functions Changes the order of the main functions and modes that are displayed in the Basic and the User choice tabs in order to make the display more appropriate to the way you use the copier 1 Select Customize Main function and then press the Change key 2 Press the cursor up down keys Move Ahead key or the Move Behind Move backward key to change the order of the basic functions and modes Adds often used functions and or modes or to change the order of their layout in order to make the display more appropriate to the way use of the copier 1 Select Customize Add function and then press the Change key 2 Press the cursor up down keys and change the order of layout um key to 1 4 5 2FD 2FF 2FG 4 Machine default Auto sleep time Auto drawer switching ON OFF Turns automatic drawer switching ON or OFF 1 Select Auto drawer switching Auto cassette switching and then press the Change key 2 Select On or Off key 3 Select All types of paper or Feed same paper type key Paper size drawer No 1 No 4 Sets the size of paper that is loaded in drawer No 1 through No 4 1 Select one of
217. erformed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U099 Initializing original size Description Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor malfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like Start 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select an item and press the start key The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission data B W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Method to display the data for the sensor 1 Press the start key The detection sensor transmission data is displayed Rear of machine 123 123 123 Center of machine 123 123 123 Front of machine 255 255 255 Figure 1 4 6 2 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Setting 1 Select an item to be set Display Description Setting range Initial setting LEVEL Detection sensor t
218. ess the reset key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared When all counts are cleared the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing counts by optional devices Description Displays or clears the counts of the optional DP or finisher Purpose To check the use of the DP and finisher Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the device the count of which is to be checked and press the start key The count of the selected device is displayed e DP Display Description ADP No of single sided originals that has passed through the DP in ADP mode RADP No of double sided originals that has passed through the DP in RADP mode Finisher SORTER Display Description CP CNT No of copies that has passed STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated PUNCH Frequency the punch has been activated SADDLE Frequency the booklet has been activated Clearing 1 Select the item to be cleared The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Press the start key The count is cleared 3 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for s
219. ess the reset key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting 1 Enter a six digit count using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit the maintenance mode without changing the count press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 37 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 38 Description Setting toner refresh operation Description Sets the drum refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying Purpose To change the drum refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying if image flow level is low Method Press the start key The screen br executing is displayed Setting 1 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting ON TIME SEC Toner refresh operation time 50 to 150 sec 120 BIAS TIME MSEC Developing bias on time 500 to 1000 msec 700 30 cpm 540 40 50 cpm 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Performing drum refresh operation Description Executes drum refresh
220. et finishe is attached Purpose Sets the punch limit to notify the user of the time to collect punch hole scap Also used to manually clear the punch hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punch hole scrap is shown on the touch panel afte collection If punch hole scrap is collected with the copier power turned off the punch hole scrap count is not cleared and consequently this problem occurs Start 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting in item is displayed 2 Select the item The selecting an item is displayed in reverse Display Description Setting range Initial setting PUNCH LIMIT Punch limit 0 to 999000 75000 maximum number of punching times PUNCH COUNT Punch hole scrap count 0 to 999999 0 current number of punching times Setting the punch limit 1 Change the setting using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Clearing 1 Press the reset key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared and the screen br selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations Purpose To check the paper jam status Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumalle parts Implementation Press the start key The
221. etting DOUBLE COUNT 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 54 Turning auto start function on off Description Selects if the auto start function is turned on Purpose Normally no change is necessary If incorrect operation occurs turn the function off this may solve the problem Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select either ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Auto start function on OFF Auto start function off Initial setting ON 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U255 Setting auto clear time Description Sets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete Purpose To be set according to frequency of use Set to a comparatively long time for continuous copying at the same settings and a comparatively short time for frequent copying at various s
222. ettings Method Press the start key The current setting is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Auto clear time 0 to 270 90 The setting can be changed by 30 s per step When set to 0 the auto clear function is cancelled 2 Press the start key The value is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Switching copy operation at toner empty detection Description Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected and sets the number of copies that can be made after the detection Method Press the start key The current setting is displayed Seiting 1 Select single or continuous copying The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description SINGLE Enables only single copying CONTINUE Enables single and continuous copying Initial setting SINGLE Set the number of copies that can be made using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Number of copies after toner empty detection 0 to 200 copies 70 The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step When set to 0 the number of copies is not limited regardless of the setting for single or continuous cop
223. etui b 1 1 4 1 1 3 Machine cross Section Tu kee aa oe eui e aie ia ead dE 1 1 5 191 4 DrVe system R EE uman anna vei Dar Q Estes AME escudo LEE Dd 1 1 6 1 Drive system 1 drive motor and eject motor drive Irains 1 1 6 2 Drive system 2 paper feed motor drive train 1 1 7 3 Drive system 3 duplex section u u u awuha iS aQ nu nnne renes 1 1 8 1 2 Handling Precautions EEN BER II 1 2 1 1 2 2 e Z dA eee endete E 1 2 1 1 2 3 Installation environmeht 2 cea diee ea a eb MR a us 1 2 1 1 3 Installation 1 3 1 Unpacking and installatign 2t eite Heel l He EIL en Fe Feo dee ri ap 1 3 1 Ty Installation procedUre nci teret dtes titre t ed bcd de iene 1 3 1 1 3 2 Setting initial Copy modes aee eene bes stone daca re cete au EEE unn Spa qa 1 3 8 1 3 3 Installing the key counter option 1 3 9 1 3 4 Installing the drawer heater option enn nennen nnne nnne nens 1 3 11 1 3 5 Installing the paper feeder option 1 3 13 1 3 6 Installing the large paper deck option eene nennen 1 3 17 1 3 7 Installing the booklet stitcher switchback unit option 1 3 22 1 3 8 Installing the sheet through document processor option 1 3 33 1 3 9 Installing the Printing System option 1 3 34 1 3 10 Installing the Scanning System option L nennen nennen 1 3 36 1 3 11 Installing the built in finisher option 1 3 39 1 3 12 Installing the job separator option 1 3 45 1 3 1
224. euo ojuo jeu o 400q ZU LL ew ue jo Buikdoo xajdnq g9 oN Heya BuluurL 2 4 8 2FD 2FF 2FG Su GG UV L LOA OL ZOA SV 9L9A ZI LLOA sw 00pL Su 0p SES SW 60 eV OLOA Tsu or Ts op paeds moj ye p ds uiu je peeds moj ye p ds uiu ye paads moj 1e VIG LIG 910A Voie pM H uongo nay H uonejoipw4 L voeo noy IH vo pmd swog su os swog TT SW oe swoot v LOKA sw 0 Sui OF c8 0L9A SW zc LE 9LOA sw ez sul 0 sw 0 VL ELOA Sur gzul Sur eZ uN su pz suog Su pz swog SU pel sw 08 super swog 98 910A su 0002 UIN ZL OL LLOA sul QOL LL 6 LLOA SW gp sugp 3 3 g g Q Q o c E D e e a a lt lt Jo41u092 Ayisuap doo one 00 onei uoneoriuDeui ameip 1eddn i ido2 ay WO4 seidoo ip LL p V Xejdnp om oluo sjeulBio 2 9X LL p V p pis IBuis om Jo Bu do2 xejdnp snonunuog GON Heyo Buluur L Wad OC Wad OL va OLOA MSOddna MSS LMS3 MS3 MSH na Wad ON 104dNd N 104d 194 104 Wad wa Kay uelis 2 4 9 2FD 2FF 2FG LOA W3H 8d F LF 019A WER OL wO EMSS vr zwei li LI ITT UI ul AN INS3 LEV 919A MS3 sw 60 eN 019A MSH vlad LL8 910A na sw 00L K F OA W3H OW SU eer N 194dqd lt sw zz Sul gg H GV ELOA 104 2L
225. f necessary Electrical problem with pa per feed clutch 1 Check 10 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in large paper deck horizontal paper conveying section Jam code 17 Paper in the large paper deck is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace Defective paper path sen sor 1 With 5 V DC present at CN6 6 on the deck main PCB check if CN6 5 on the deck main PCB remains low when paper path sensor 1 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sen sor 1 Check if the deck feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select the deck feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the deck feed clutch Check 11 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in copier vertical paper conveying section Jam code 18 Optional 1 5 12 Broken feed switch 1 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace feed switch 1 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken feed switch 2 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 2 if its a
226. f the black arrow s and retighten the two screws If the test pattern output looks like B move the adjuster in the direction of the white arrow gt and retighten the two screws 5 Output a test pattern again 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 until the centers of the paper and the test pattern are aligned ZO hn Olm Screw Adjuster Screw Figure 1 3 40 7 Loosen the five screws 8 Adjust the position of the front cover so that the level indicating the position of the adjuster and the level indicating the position of the front cover are the same If the positions of the adjuster and front cover are not aligned the paper cassette cannot be closed properly 9 Retighten the five screws Levels Levels Ol hg S d Ao rw bail i TE Adjuster 3 Screw Front cover Figure 1 3 41 1 3 21 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 7 Installing the booklet stitcher switchback unit option Preparation 1 Open the conveying cover of the copier 2 Remove the two screws securing the feedshift guide assembly and then the assembly 3 Fit the curl eliminator to the conveying cover such that the projections on the cover fit into the two ends of the curl eliminator 4 Secure the curl eliminator using the two screws removed in step 2 5 Close the conveying cover 6 Fit the
227. front right caster in the same manner as in step 2 so that each center of the hooking portions of the latch catch is aligned with the center of the two hooks on the finisher when the finisher is joined to the copier viewed from above be Hook Hooking portions ee sss Hooking sS s Hook portions y Toe f Figure 1 3 147 1 3 61 2FD 2FF 2FG 4 Adjust the height of the left two casters in the same manner as in step 2 so that the right and left gaps a between the finisher and the copier are the same at the top and bottom when the finisher is detached from the copier 5 Reattach the removed parts to their original positions Connecting the signal cable 1 Connect the signal cable of the finisher to the copier Operation check 1 Insert the copier power plug to the wall outlet and turn the power switch on 2 Make test copies and check that the finisher operates correctly 1 3 62 a _ SESS 5 E LL X27 w7 m Signal cable J oy Figure 1 3 148 Figure 1 3 149 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 16 Installing the 3000 sheet finisher option Procedure Mounting the curl eliminator 1 Open the copier s left cover 2 Remove two screws and take off the feedshift guide assembly ss Lez NELLO Du LS 60277 8 7 gt lt Ny e f ls Life REOS cea di Ka lt Feedshift guide assembly
228. g Ground Fax control PCB FPVSYNC signal Ground Fax control PCB FOVSYNC signal Ground Fax control PCB FOHSTHIN signal Ground Fax control PCB FMIPOUTO signal Ground Fax control PCB FMREOUT signal Ground Fax control PCB FFOCLK signal Ground Fax control PCB MMISTS signal Ground Fax control PCB FMMI_TXD2 signal Ground Fax control PCB FMMI_RXD2 signal Ground Fax control PCB FAXRESET signal Fax control PCB FAXREADY signal Fax control PCB PREQ signal Fax control PCB SREQ signal Fax control PCB SETFAX signal Fax control PCB MAINSTS signal Ground Fax control PCB FMAIN TXDO signal Ground Fax control PCB FMAIN RXDO signal Connected to the fax control PCB GND 24V 24 V DC Ground 24 V DC supply YC51 Connected to the right operation unit PCB Optional 2 3 16 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse PH KEY signal PH LED signal Ground 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 3 3 Operation unit PCB Operation unit right PCB pees ens DIGKEYS DIGKEY6 d DIGKEY7 SCAN5 C37 LL HO SANE DIGLED7 DIGLED8 Main PCB Operation unit left PCB A A DIGKEY1 CET KEY25 g KEY26 KEY29 KEY30 DIGKEY2 KEY34 4B KEY35 J wi DIGKEYS DIGLED1 DIGLED2 DIGLED3 DIGLED4 DIGLED5 DIGLED6 Figure 2 3 5 Operation unit PCB block diagram 2 3 17
229. g Data Base Assistant Description Sets whether or not the database linkage setting is enabled if an optional network scanner is installed Purpose According to user request changes the setting Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Database linkage setting is enabled OFF Database linkage setting is disabled Initial setting ON 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 64 Setting the time out Description Sets the communication timeout time for connection to a computer Purpose To change the preset value if a communication error occurs after connection to a computer continues for a long time By delaying the error detection timing the error may be cleared If the error is not cleared after the preset value is changed however return the preset value to the initial value Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Description Setting range Initial setting timeout time 10 to 120 s 10 The setting can be
230. g edge registration RCL ON DUP Leading edge registration for duplex copying second face Select the items to be adjusted RCL ON BYP Leading edge registration for feeding the bypass Press the start key Press the interrupt key The new setting is stored Press the start key to output a test pattern For output example 1 increase the value using the cursor down key For output example 2 decrease the value using the cursor up key Is the leading edge registration correct Setting range initial setting RCL ON 30 0 30 0 0 5 Press the stop clear key to exit RCL ON DUP 10 0 10 0 0 maintenance mode RCL ON BYP 10 0 10 0 1 5 Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0 1 mm End 1 6 10 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 2 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leading edge of the original during memory copying U053 U034 U065 U066 U407 P 1 4 22 P 1 6 10 P 1 6 27 28 P 1 6 29 Caution Before making the following adjustment ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode Procedure Y Enter maintenance mode Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Y Enter 407 using the numeric keys S i Figure 1 6 22 Y Press
231. g heater does not t rn off lite ee ti ee ele 1 5 50 81 Main Charging iS niotiperformoed EE 1 5 50 32 Transfer charging is not performed seis uay erii cerises reda rid pasted 1 5 51 99 No developing Dlas IS te E 1 5 51 34 The original size is not detected DEE 1 5 51 35 The original size is not detected correctly ullu u u UU UU ias asassashasasaswadakanta saus asaa 1 5 51 36 The touch panel keys do mot work u u L L u qha nennen enne nnne nennen nnne 1 5 51 37 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the upper drawer ENEE 1 5 51 38 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the lower drawer u uu 1 5 51 39 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the bypass tray u u uu uu 1 5 51 40 The size of paper in the upper drawer is not displayed correctly 1 5 52 41 The size of paper in the lower drawer is not displayed correctly 1 5 52 42 The printing width of the paper on the bypass tray is not detected correctly 1 5 52 43 A paper jam in the paper feed paper conveying or fixing section is indicated when the power switch is turned on sessssseseeeeeeeeeeennnne nennen nnne nnne nnne nnne nnne 1 5 53 44 The message reque
232. g the machine used circumstances list Setting the type of fixing unit Specifying the aging bebre copying ID code scanner count mode setting HDD Scandisk Checking clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Checking clearing the scanner count Outputting a VTC PG pattern Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Initial setting ON OFF ENERGY STAR MODEO OFF OFF OFF 75000 0 1 4 13 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No Description U000 Outputting an own status report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items and paper jam and service call occurrences Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items or paper jam or service call occurrences Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item to be output The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Output list MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modes JAM List of the paper jam occurrences SERVICE CALL List of the service call occurrences 3 Press the start key The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is output When A4 11 x 81 2 paper is available a report of this
233. g the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light Purpose To check duration of use of the exposure lamp Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replacement Method Press the start key The accumulated time of illumination br the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes Clearing 1 Press the reset key 2 Press the start key The accumulated time is cleared and the screen br selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Setting 1 Enter a six digit accumulated time using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The time is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the scanner count Description Displays the scanner operation count Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner Method Press the start key Display Description COPY SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for copying FAX SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for fax NT SCAN COUNT Network scanner operation count Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance Description item No Outputting a VTC PG pattern Description Selects and outputs aVTC PG pattern created
234. g two M4 x 6 binding screws at the positions where the screw holes in it and those in the rail fixing plate meet M4 x 6 binding screws Screw holes M4 x 6 binding screws Rail fixing plate Guide rail Figure 1 3 143 12 Adjust the position of the rail fixing plate so that the gap between the plate and the floor is approximately 8 0 mm and then tighten the Rail fixing plate two loosely fitted M4 x 6 binding screws If the finisher and the copier do not engage securely perform the following finisher height adjustment 8 0 mm M4 x 6 binding screws d IN p gt Figure 1 3 144 1 3 60 2FD 2FF 2FG Adjusting the height of the finisher 1 Remove the front and rear covers from the finisher by removing two screws each When removing the covers open both ends of the covers in the directions indicated by the arrows and remove three inside ribs to remove the covers Figure 1 3 145 2 Loosen the two screws on the rear right caster of the finisher Adjust the height of the rear right caster by turning its adjustment bolt using a cross headed screwdriver so that the axis of the pin of the latch catch is aligned with the marking of the slot of the finisher when the finisher is joined to the copier viewed from the machine front Note Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the finisher while turning it counterclockwise lowers the finisher Figure 1 3 146 3 Adjust the height of the
235. gist cleaner Registration switch Contact glass Slit glass Mirror 1 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Exposure lamp Original size detection switch Transfer roller unit Developing unit Drum unit Drum unit Main charger unit Fixing unit Press roller separation claw Eject roller Switchback roller Eject pulley Switchback pulley Name used in parts list PULLEY PAPER FEED PULLEY SEPARATION PULLEY FEED A UPPER PULLEY BYPASS PULLEY SEPARATION PULLEY FEED A ROLLER2 BYPASSFEED ROLLER4 BYPASSFEED ROLLER REGIST RIGHT ROLLER REGIST PULLEY FEED PULLEY FEED ROLLER B FEED ROLLER C FEED SWITCH REGISTRATION UNDER CLEANER REGIST GUIDE REGIST F CONTACT GLASS CONTACT GLASS ADF MIRROR A MIRROR B LAMP SCANNER SENSOR ORIGINAL PARTS TRANSFER ROLLER PARTS DEVELOPER ASSY PARTS DRUM ASS Y SP PARTS DRUM ASS Y PARTS MAIN C MC700 PARTS FIXING ASS Y120 SP PARTS FIXING ASS Y230 SP CLAW PRESS ROLLER ROLLER EXIT ROLLER FEED SHIFT PULLEY EXIT C PULLEY FEED SHIFT Part No 2AR07220 2AR07230 2BJ06010 61706770 2AR07230 2BJ06010 2BL06540 2BL06560 2FG16021 2FG06210 2BL16080 2BL06930 2BL06080 2BL06090 2FG27110 2BL07950 2BL16130 35912010 2FG12020 2AV12150 2AV12160 2AV12100 20927090 2FG93091 2BJ93010 2FG93011 2BJ93021 2BL93091 2FG93032 2FG93042 2BL20350 2BL21020 2BL21030 2BL21520 2BL21330 XO O oO oO O O 2000202 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 x o o ala 99 N N 2 4
236. h FRCSW Detects the opening and closing of the front cover Conveying cover switch CCSW Detects the opening and closing of the conveying cover Side cover switch SCSW Detects the opening and closing of the side cover Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW EE Detects a paper jam in the duplex section 2 2 3 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Motors O OO JO O G N zk a a no pert Co Machine front Z Machine inside C Machine rear Figure 2 2 3 Motors Drive motor DM en Drives the machine Paper feed motor PFM Drives paper feed section Upper lift motor LM U ar Drives upper drawer lift Lower lift motor LM L Drives lower drawer lift Scanner motor SM aeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenen Drives the optical system Eject motor EM Drives the eject section Cooling fan motor 1 CFM1 Cools the machine interior Cooling fan motor 2 CFM2 Cools the machine interior Cooling fan motor 3 CFM3 Cools the machine interior Cooling fan motor 4 CFM4 Cools the machine interior around the power supply unit Cooling fan motor 5 CFM5 Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying Cooling fan motor 6 CFM6 Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer fo
237. h does not turn on within 10 s of the desk upper lift motor turning on At this time removal and insertion of the drawer is prompted Even after removal and insertion of the drawer the upper lift limit switch does not turn on This problem occurs four times continuously Broken gears or couplings of the desk upper lift motor Replace the desk upper lift motor Defective desk upper lift motor Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the desk upper lift motor Poor contact of the desk upper lift motor connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Defective desk upper lift limit switch Check if CN1 5 on the desk main PCB goes low when the desk upper lift limit switch is turned off If not replace the desk upper lift limit switch Poor contact of the desk upper lift limit switch con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Desk lower lift motor problem When the lower drawer of the optional paper feeder is inserted the desk lower lift limit switch does not turn on within 10 s of the desk lower lift motor turning on At this time removal and insertion of the drawer is prompted Even after removal and insertion of the drawer the lower lift limit switch does not turn on This problem occurs
238. h of the front and rear lateral size adjusters 2FD 2FF 2FG bk sa dl F j i Leveling bolts Figure 1 3 34 M4 x 16 chrome TP screws Figure 1 3 35 am Screw NE Leteral size adjuster Th N ftti LT u go D o ale Sliders N N Sliders Leteral size adjuster Meo s nen s B La Ea E O C Screw Figure 1 3 36 1 3 19 2FD 2FF 2FG 4 Insert the upper tabs and lower tabs of the front and rear lateral size adjusters into the upper slots and lower slots respectively such that the size indicators point to the size of paper to be used Secure the lateral size adjusters using the screw for each 5 Move the front and rear sliders two at each point outward until they make contact with the lateral size adjusters Lower tabs Lower tabs w 7 E Ge A CG Fi v3 V d Lower slots Lower slots 6 Remove the screw from each of the left and right longitudinal size adjusters It
239. hange the setting using the cursor up down keys On and off of the exposure lamp 0 off or 1 on Description Setting range Initial setting DP input light luminosity 0108 1 Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower 2 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 28 Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U076 Executing DP automatic adjustment Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DP scanning section Adjusting the DP magnification U070 Adjusting the DP scanning timing U071 Adjusting the DP center line U072 Adjusting the margins for scanning an original from the DP U404 When you run this maintenance mode the preset values of U070 U071 U072 and U404 will also be updated Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DP scanning section Method 1 Set a specified original part number 2AC68241 in the DP 2 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When adjustment is complete each adjusted value is displayed Disp
240. he front a test copy at 100 magnification left cover and close the front cover Open the front cover and remove the front left cover see page 1 6 36 Loosen the screw holding each of the fixing unit and adjusting spacer For copy example 1 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the black arrow 4m to raise the front position of the fixing unit For copy example 2 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the white arrow gt to lower the front position of the fixing unit Is the image correct Fixing unit E r e gt D Screw _ Adjusting spacer Figure 1 6 80 1 6 41 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 1 6 8 Others 1 Detaching and refitting the ozone filters only for 230 V specifications Follow the procedure below to replace the ozone filters Procedure 1 Remove the ozone filter A from the corveying cover Ozone filter A Figure 1 6 81 2 Remove the ozone filter B from the rear cover Ozone filter B 3 Replace the ozone filter A and B and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 6 82 1 6 42 1 7 1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB Firmware upgrading requires the following tools Compact Flash Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer be sure to format it in advance Procedure 1 2 Turn the p
241. heck for cor rect operation Large paper deck paper feeder communication problem Communication errors from the com munication microcomputer on the main PCB No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a commu nication error parity or checksum er ror is detected five times in succession Poor contact in the connector ter minals Check the connection of connectors CN3 on the main PCB and the connector on the deck main PCB desk main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation Defective deck main PCB desk main PCB Replace the deck main PCB desk main PCB and check for correct operation 1 5 22 Finisher communication problem Communication errors from the com munication microcomputer on the main PCB No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a commu nication error parity or checksum er ror is detected five times in succes sion Poor contact in the connector ter minals Check the connection of connectors YC4 YC5 on the main PCB and CN2 on the fin isher main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation Defective finisher main PCB Replace the fini
242. hes DEVELOPER SENSOR Toner sensor TNS CONTAINER SET Toner container detection switch TCDSW CONTAINER SENSOR Toner container sensor TCS DISPOSAL TANK SET Toner disposal tank detection switch TDDSW DISPOSAL TANK SENSOR Overflow sensor OFS Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Checking clearing the developing drive time Description Displays the developing drive time for checking clearing or changing a figure which is used as a reference when correcting the toner control It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed Purpose To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit Method Press the start key The developing drive time is displayed in minutes Clearing 1 Press the reset key 2 Press the start key The time is cleared and the screen br selecting a maintenance item Na is displayed Setting 1 Enter a five digit drive time in minutes using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The time is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the time press the stop clear key The screen fr selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the developing count Description Displays the developing count for checking a figure which is used as a reference when correcting the tone control Purpose To check the developing count after replacing the dev
243. hreshold value 0 to 255 170 WAIT TIME Original size judgment time 0 to 100 50 A4R AREA Threshold value in the main scan direction 220 mm 240 for A4R detection 240 mm ORIG AREA Original size detection position display mm 0 to 350 _ SIZE Detected original size display 0to 63 Time from activation of the original detection switch ODSW to original size judgment Method to set the detection threshold value 1 Adjust the preset value using the cursor up down keys A larger value increases the sensor sensitivity and a smaller value decreases it 2 Press the start key The value is set 3 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Method to set the original size judgment time 1 Adjust the preset value using the cursor up down keys A larger value increases the original size judgment time and a smaller value decreases it 2 Press the start key The value is set 3 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 35 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 36 Description Checking the operation of main high voltage Description Performs main charging Purpose To check main charging Start Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Display Description MC ON Turning the main
244. i va CIT u eL EZ I 8 za ONST aR ee EE AS doad cy a 8 LO WER on 225 As J amp IOFAN zz S ox C Lu HA EO OI ez 2n EE AS L 91v zado yc ao EG F8 v 6PNO SLY tadol ez oS nd AS Jo viv 0d OI 9 2 C P R e lv 33O dE G97 7 2 n 8 LL 318VN3 AdOO loa ZL 9S SSA GO os Dk E Oe 9 u QNO ory Hv S GGA OU es Lg zd dol Y Y Abe lig olv 9S SSA GO 91 2 01 6 Gett ayy WB avo AS 2 1 6Y do 05102 es ease E e SE ano c 9 a 8v AVO1 O91 21 2 9 3HO dsld Q91 3 u 8 XH lo Za d Ze 3ivd3 ONT 6 L8 INOS 021 oL ONS oa 3v Noe T a SSISSA 191 RIS ol IS Oe TI sv IAS g ss AS GGA 021 wee SISONAdOO o yv Gi amp UI egen ale aj Re INNOD Loara g 8 V zx amp 3 dO GT Tt z S s INNOS daaa e 9 zv ua Ge e m Lb S25 5 OF ON y H Damm aWves 091 IEZ2 NINOS e el cho amp i ER ENZ zL EXAMI j z s L LE INVOS c i L4 A 0L ZNVOS o ry cx z Sy 000 Seas irn As let 6 ENVOS 7 Et HR id i sett 8 YNVOS S ev SZ D B k am A EIOoL So 12 eg amp i Lv ZX EE Q S as TEC UN9 B gt g SIE d eh pe Sz Sr q E qd 0 a ISI ste ONG d LL U ig amp 8 9 DILL S Z mes 5 Y POSTE z ISS 1 o 88 Z NS Je 8 SQ319ld p p E gt 9 OND r gt o9 IdlHd p gt 9d3a19ld liga S S m Sir EG A3NHd ES ott 39V ae i69 o e Dao z LLL Jer Lo art NOO N o i eo N KYOCERA M
245. ical paper conveying section The registration switch RSW does not turn on within 936 ms of feed switch 1 FSW1 turning on Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within 1079 ms of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn on within 1203 ms of feed switch 3 FSW3 turning on Misfeed in paper feed desk vertical paper con veying section Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within 888 ms of the desk feed switch DFSW turning on Misfeed in bypass verti cal paper conveying sec tion The registration switch RSW does not turn on within 3932 ms of the bypass feed switch BYPFSW turning on Multiple sheets in copier paper feed section Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within the time re quired to convey the length of the used paper size plus 1123 ms of turning on Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within the time re quired to convey the length of the used paper size plus 1123 ms of turning on 1 5 3 2FD 2FF 2FG Section Jam code Description Conditions Paper feed section 21 Multiple sheets in copier paper feed section Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within the time re quired to convey the length of the used paper size plus 635 ms of turning on The desk feed switch DFSW does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 635 ms of turning on The bypass feed switch
246. ig size key Press the Close key Execute original size registration page 1 4 7 Press the Close key Enter the _ Make user adjustment management code page 1 4 8 Press the Counter check key gt Press the Close key Check the total counter page 1 4 8 Press the User adjustment key Press the Document Management key Press the Close key Enter the Make document management management code default settings page 1 4 8 Press the Box Management Hard Disk Management key Press ine Close Key Enter the Execute hard disk management management code items page 1 4 8 Press the Print report key Press the Close key Output the report Y page 1 4 8 Press the Language key Press the Close key Set the language page 1 4 8 End 1 4 1 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 Setting department management items Register new department ID codes Check individual departments Registers department ID codes and the corresponding department name and set certain restrictions for using the copier under that ID code 1 Press the Management edit key 2 Press the Register key 3 Select ID code and then press the Change key 4 Enter the department ID code to register up to 8 digits
247. ighting selection signal DIGLED1 should be driven low in synchronization with a low level on the scan signal SCAN1 LEDs can be lit dynamically by repeating such operations As another example if KEY 23 is pressed the corresponding key switch is turned on feeding the low level of the scan signal SCAN1 back to the main PCB MPCB via the return signal DIGKEY1 The main PCB MPCB locates the position where the line outputting the scan signal and the line inputting the return signal cross and thereby determines which key switch was operated 2 3 18 2FD 2FF 2FG Os O ke a o B d O Ca C O ees K K30 Figure 2 3 7 Operation unit left PCB silk screen diagram 2 3 19 2FD 2FF 2FG Connector Pin No Signal Voltage Description CN1 Connected to the main PCB OO O OQ G N DIGKEY1 DIGKEY2 DIGKEY3 SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 SCAN4 DIGLED1 DIGLED2 DIGLED3 DIGLED4 DIGLED5 DIGLED6 o000 6 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse OPCB L DIGKEY1 signal OPCB L DIGKEY2 signal OPCB L DIGKEY3 signal OPCB L SCAN1 signal OPCB L SCAN signal OPCB L SCANS signal OPCB L SCAN4 signal OPCB L DIGLED1 signal OPCB L DIGLED2 signal OPCB L DIGLED3 signal OPCB L DIGLEDA signal OPCB L DIGLEDS signal OPCB L
248. ignal is detected for 0 5 s or longer Poor contact in the paper convey ing motor connec tor terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The paper con veying motor mal functions Replace the paper conveying motor and check for correct operation Defective finisher main PCB Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation Optional Contents 2FD 2FF 2FG Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Finisher paper conveying belt problem 3000 sheet finisher An on to off or off to on state change of the paper conveying belt home po sition sensor is not detected within 2 s of the paper conveying belt clutch turning on The paper con veying belt is out of phase Adjust the paper conveying belt so that it is in phase and check for correct operation The paper con veying belt clutch malfunctions Replace the paper conveying belt clutch and check for correct operation The paper con veying belt home position sensor malfunctions Replace the paper conveying belt home position sensor and check for correct op eration The paper con veying belt home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The internal tray is inco
249. il e LSU spacer lt Figure 1 6 45 2FD 2FF 2FG 5 Detaching and refitting the ISU reference Take the following procedure when the ISU is to be checked or replaced Caution After replacing the ISU make a test copy and check the copy image If the image is incorrect perform the adjustments see pages 1 6 25 to 31 ISU installation requires the following tools Two positioning pins P N 1856812 Procedure Detaching the ISU 1 Remove the contact glass see page 1 6 19 2 Remove the rear and shield covers and detach connector YC34 on the main PCB YC34 Figure 1 6 46 3 Remove the eight screws holding the ISU cover and then the cover e Figure 1 6 47 4 Remove the two screws holding the original Original size detection sensor retainer size detection sensor retainer and then the retainer 5 Remove the four screws holding the ISU and then the ISU 6 Check or replace the ISU Figure 1 6 48 1 6 23 2FD 2FF 2FG Refitting the ISU 1 Fit the ISU using the two positioning pins 2 Secure the ISU using the four screws 3 Remove the two positioning pins and refit all the removed parts 1 6 24 Positioning pins Figure 1 6 49 2FD 2FF 2FG 6 Adjusting the position of the ISU reference Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed lateral squareness not obtained Caution Be sure t
250. in vender operation such as mode and unit price This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 COUNT1 is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights 3 As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1 When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right the top LED in that line will light 4 When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds 5 When the LEDs go off press the start key All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Seiting the paper size for the large paper deck Description Sets the size of paper used in the optional large paper deck Purpose To change the setting when the size of paper used in the large paper deck is changed Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Seiting 1 Select the pa
251. ines whether or not the Sort mode will be the default setting in the initial mode 1 Select Sort and then press the Change key 2 Select Sort On or Sort Off key Auto Rotation mode ON OFF Auto exposure adjustment Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto exposure mode when making color copies 1 Select Auto exposure adj Auto and then press the Change key 2 Adjust the exposure using the Lighter key or the Darker key Setting range 3 to 3 Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode 1 Select Auto Rotation and then press the Change key 2 Select Rotate or No Rotate key Margin width Auto exposure adjustment OCR Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning with OCR Optical Character Recognition software when using the optional scanner functions of this copier 1 Select Adjust auto exposure OCR and then press the Change key 2 Adjust the exposure using the Lighter key or the Darker key Setting range 3 to 3 1 4 4 Determines the default value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode 1 Select Default margin width and then press the Change key 2 Press the cursor up down and left right keys as desired to change the default margins and margin widths to the desired setting Setting r
252. initially set to position 1 and can be adjusted to five positions 1 to SCH 3 Run paper through the machine 4 Check the upward curl on the ejected paper 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until there is no curl 6 Reattach the finisher s upper and tighten the four screws p En Le 1 3 70 d VAS A d Lower lever je l Front cover Figure 1 3 171 Screws Upper lever Figure 1 3 173 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 4 1 Copier management In addition to a maintenance function for service the copier is equipped with a management function which can be operated by users mainly by the copier administrator In this copier management mode settings such as default settings can be changed 1 Using the copier management mode Press the Default Setting Counter key Press the Management key Enter the Execute department manage e 4 management code ment items page 1 4 2 Press the Copy default key d Press the Close key Enter the Make copy default settings management code page 1 4 3 Press the Machine default key Press the Close key Enter the Make machine default settings management code page 1 4 6 Press the Bypass setting key Press the Close key Make bypass settings page 1 4 7 Press the Register or
253. interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description Stabilizing fixing forcibly Description Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly regardless of fixing temperature Purpose To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization tempeature Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press the start key The forced stabilization mode is entered and stabilization opeation stops regardless of fixing temperature The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed To exit the forced stabilization mode turn the power off and on Completion To exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization press the stop clear ley The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Resetting the fixing problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature Method 1 Press the start key The screen br executing is displayed 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key The fixing problem data is initialized Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking fixing c
254. ion 2 Main charging section 8 Optical section Developing section 5 Transfer and separation section 6 Cleaning and charge erasing section section 7 Fixing section Eject and switchback section 9 Duplex section 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 1 4 Drive system 1 Drive system 1 drive motor and eject motor drive trains As viewed from machine rear Figure 1 1 4 D Drive motor gear Registration clutch gear Drum gear Z76H Z30H Gear Z63H Z45S Drum gear Z70H Gear Z37S Gear Z76H Z35H 2 Gear Z24S Gear Z50H 3 Joint gear Z32S Gear Z36S Z31H Eject motor gear Gear Z37H 28H 5 Gear Z47S Z28S Gear Z34H Eject gear Z30S 1 1 6 2 Drive system 2 paper feed motor drive train 2FD 2FF 2FG As viewed from machine rear Figure 1 1 5 Paper feed motor gear 2 Gear Z76H Z35S 3 Feed gear Z25 4 Feed gear Z25 5 Feed gear Z25 6 Feed gear Z25 2 Gear Z41S Z24S P30 Upper paper feed clutch gear 9 Paper feed drive belt Gear Z41S Z24S 3 Lower paper feed clutch gear Gear Z41S P15 3 Bypass drive belt Gear Z60S P20 4 Gear Z41S P18 Gear Z40S Z32S Container drive belt Gear Z24S P40 Gear Z40S Z25S GO Container gear 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Drive system 3 duplex section Figure 1 1 6 Pulley T30 2 Duplex belt 3 Pulley T30 4 Duplex feed clutch gear Gear 25 Idle gear 20 Gear 25 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 2 1 Drum Note the following when handling or
255. ion Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original Purpose To be executed if there is a regular error between the centers of the orginal and the copy image when the optional DP is used Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U034 P U067 U072 Method Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed Setting 1 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys E Change in Display Description Setting range Initial setting Value per step 1 sided Simplex copy mode 39 to 39 3 0 17 mm 2 sided front Front face in duplex copy mode 39 to 39 2 0 17 mm 2 sided back Reverse face in duplex copy mode 39 to 39 3 0 17 mm Increasing the setting moves the image to the right and decreasing it moves the image to the left 2 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Adjustment 1 In interrupt copy mode make a copy using the DP 2 Check the copy image and adjust the center line as follows For copy example 1 increase the setting For copy example 2 decrease the setting Reference L Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 4 3 Completion Pre
256. ion sensor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The front side reg istration home po sition sensor mal functions Replace the front side registration home position sensor and check for correct op eration Defective finisher main PCB Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation 1 5 33 2FD 2FF 2FG Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Finisher rear side registration motor problem 3000 sheet finisher or built in finisher f the rear side registration home posi tion sensor is on in initialization the sensor does not turn off within 570 ms of starting initialization If the rear side registration home posi tion sensor is off in initialization the sensor does not turn on within 2880 ms of starting initialization The rear side reg istration motor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The rear side reg istration motor malfunctions Replace the rear side registration motor and check for correct operation The rear side reg istration home po sition sensor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or repla
257. ious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol ACAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle AA symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol AN General warning AN Warning of risk of electric shock LAN waring of high temperature O indicates a prohibited action The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol General prohibited action OO Disassembly prohibited indicates that action is required The specific action required is shown inside the symbol General action required Remove the power plug from the wall outlet Always ground the copier Gag 1 Installation Precautions AAWARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections to one outlet they may cause fire or electric shock When using an extension cable always check that it is adequate for the rated current AANEREN Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock Never connect the ground cable to any of the following gas pipes lightning rods
258. isher communication problem C0450 Mailbox communication problem C0470 Switchback unit communication problem CO640 Hard disk drive problem C1010 Upper lift motor problem C1020 Lower lift motor problem C1030 Desk upper lift motor problem C1040 Desk lower lift motor problem C1100 Paper deck motor 1 problem C1110 Paper deck motor 2 problem C1120 Deck right lift position problem C1130 Deck leftlift position problem C2600 Deck conveying motor desk drive motor problem C801 0 Finisher paper conveying motor problem to C8500 Mailbox drive motor problem Optional 1 5 20 2 Self diagnostic codes Contents 2FD 2FF 2FG Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Fax control PCB problem Problems with data from fax control PCB Defective fax control PCB Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation Abnormal detection of fax control PCB incompatibility In the initial communication with the fax control PCB any normal communication command is not transmitted Defective fax software Install the fax software to Ver 2 xx or later Defective fax control PCB Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation Operation unit PCB backup memory read write error Reading from or writing to the backup memory cannot be performed Defective EEPROM Replace EEPROM 3 and 4 Operation unit PCB backup memory data problem Da
259. itch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Check if the original feed motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remegy if necessary 1 5 17 2FD 2FF 2FG Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 27 An original jams in the DP is indicated during copying a jam in the original feed conveying section Jam code 71 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Check if the original feed motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary 28 An original jams in the DP is indicated during copying a jam in the original feed section Jam code 72 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Defective original feed switch Run main
260. itch in auto shut off Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 20 Adjusting the print start timing Adjustment See pages 1 6 10 and 12 Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description Setting folio size Description Changes the image area br copying onto folio size paper Purpose To prevent the image at the trailing edge or right or left side of the paper from not being copied ly setting the actual size of the folio paper used Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Setting Setting range Initial setting LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330 WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the copier cover switch Description Displays the on off status of each cover switch Purpose To check if the switches of covers operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key A list of the switches the on off status of which can be checked are displayed 2 Open and close each cover to check the status of each switch When the cover is closed the switch shall be displayed in reverse When the cover is open the switch shal
261. ixing heater M FH M Heats the heat roller Fixing heater S FH S Heats the heat roller Fixing unit thermostat FTS Prevents overheating in the fixing section 2 2 5 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 3 1 Power source PCB Power source PCB Rectifier circuit AC input 24 V DC 24V DC output circuit GND Zero cross SV DC circuit PC3 5V DC output circuit Switching GND control circuit IC1 Fixing heater Overvoltage control circuit detection circuit 1C201 HEATER TRA1 MAIN ON AE Ka HEATER REM1 HEATER TRA2 PC2 HEATER SUB ON REM2 Figure 2 3 1 Power source PCB block diagram The power source PCB PSPCB is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC and 5 V DC It includes a rectifier circuit a switching regulator circuit a 24 V DC output circuit a 5 V DC output circuit and a fixing heater control circuit The rectifier circuit full wave rectifies the AC input using the diode bridge D3 The smoothing capacitor C5 smoothes out the pulsed current from the diode bridge In the switching control circuit PWM controller IC1 turns the power MOSFET Q1 on and off to switch the current induced in the primary coil of the transformer T1 The 24 V DC output circuit smoothes the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diodes D101 and D102 and smoothing capacitors C101 and C102 and
262. jejeduue Bulxy ay u uA peeds N 1e s 08L 10 s l eloui z uolziliqe1s Aepuosas sJejue Jeidoo y ueuM pejgeue si Bu doo c pue uey suonipuoo 18ulO uonezi iqejs Ajepuooes si lu 191d09 out ueuM JO uo Bulun W H4 IN 1e1eeu DUU Jaye s 69 13449 jo Buruy Jaye eui ye pejqeue si Bui doo A0QqB y UCU 19410 Uonezi iqeis Kepuooes sjejue jeidoo out u uA JO uo ulun W H4 IN 161eeu DUU Jop s Lp 1 uli jo Buruy samea out ye pejqeue si Bu doo ueuiu JO Jp v9 2 9L SI eunyejeduie jueiquue y pue Jeufiu 10 Jp SS Os8 S uo Buruni uos ureui eui 1e enjejeduie Duxy eu L JOMO 10 4 212 D 000 SI uo Buluin yms urew eu 1e einjejeduiei Bulxy ueuM Z Sul oe z Paeds IInj peeds EL A 00r A 000 A 00r sa sg p ds Wm r p lqeu Bui doo A6ZE DG9l emgeet Durxy uoneziliqeis Arepuosas uo Bulusn IN H4 W 4eyeey Buixy aaye s oz p lqeu s Guido 1 uBlu 10 uu B S sI Aypiuny einjosqy JOMO JO 4 Z L2 2 001L S uo Bulun uoiiws urew y ye eunyesoduua Buxy ueuM L SW 006 390 2 9901LL nyesadw Duteu UOUEZIIOEIS AISUU SMO O0 Se pejqeue si Bu doo 1 peeds UEL uOHeZIIGe S SUIYDeW o uo p uin1 uo1s urew y WOI UO MSIN 0L29A WAY OL 21 80A Wd peeds eu W49 peeds puooes W49 LZOA WO ga LL6 LLOA wa 9 LOA SH S L9A W H3 HLEDA MSW L ON Heyo Bulu L 2 4 4 2FD 2FF 2FG e L
263. job separator eject switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the job separator eject switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 22 A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying jam in feedshift section Jam code 52 Optional 1 5 16 Check if the feedshift sole noid malfunctions Run maintenance item U033 and select the feedshift solenoid on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the feedshift solenoid Check see page 1 5 49 Broken feedshift switch actuator Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is broken Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective registration Switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on and off manually Replace the registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary
264. k level switch 1 Poor contact of deck level switch 1 connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Defective paper deck motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper desk motor 1 Poor contact of paper deck motor 1 connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable The deck left lift does not rise properly Check the gears and belts and remedy if necessary 1 5 27 2FD 2FF 2FG Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Drive motor problem LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1 S 1 s after the drive motor has turned on Poor contact in the drive motor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective drive motor rotation control circuit Replace the drive motor Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Paper feed motor problem LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1 S 1 s after the paper feed motor has turned on Poor contact in the paper feed motor connector terminals Reinsert the co
265. kes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Setting Density in the text in fax mode 1 Select the item to be adjusted The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Adjust the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting FAX TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual 0to4 2 density is set dark FAX TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual 0 to 9 2 density is set light Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Setting Density in the photo in fax mode 1 Select the item to be adjusted The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Adjust the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting FAX PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual 0 t0 6 3 density is set dark FAX PHOTO LIGHT Change in density when manual 0 t0 6 3 density is set light Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being p
266. l exposure adjustment text mode Cover drawer Sets which drawer will be used to feed the cover sheets in the cover mode the booklet stitching mode and the book to booklet mode 1 Select Drawer for cover paper Cassette for cover paper and then press the Change key 2 Press the key that corresponds to the desired drawer Settings 1st paper 2nd paper 3rd paper 4th paper Bypass The setting for drawer 3 and 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed Adjusts the median exposure value when the text mode is selected for the image quality 1 Select Manual exp adj Text and then press the Change key 2 Adjust the exposure using the Lighter key or the Darker key Setting range 3 to 3 Manual exposure adjustment photo mode Adjusts the median exposure value when the photo mode is selected for the image quality 1 Select Manual exp adj Photo and then press the Change key 2 Adjust the exposure using the Lighter key or the Darker key Setting range 3 to 3 Sort mode ON OFF Default magnification ratio Sets whether or not the appropriate magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when selecting the size of copy paper 1 Select Default magnification Default mode and then press the Change key 2 Select Manual or AMS key Determ
267. lass 3 Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of the machine Caution When moving the mirror 1 frame do not touch the exposure lamp nor the inverter PCB 4 Remove the two screws holding the metal plate on the rear of the machine and then the plate 5 Detach the exposure lamp connector from the inverter PCB 6 Remove the two screws holding the exposure lamp and then the lamp 7 Replace the exposure lamp and refit all the removed parts 2FD 2FF 2FG Contact glass H Upper rear cover Upper right cover Metal plate Figure 1 6 27 Exposure lamp Connector Figure 1 6 28 1 6 15 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner wires Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced Caution After replacing the scanner wire make a test copy and check the copy image If the image is incorrect perform the adjustments see pages 1 6 25 to 31 2 1 Detaching the scanner wires Procedure 1 Remove the exposure lamp see page 1 6 19 2 Remove the upper left cover and scanner left cover 3 Remove the inverter wire guide plate and then the wire from the inverter PCB 4 Remove the screw holding each of the front and rear wire retainers and then remove the mirror 1 frame from the scanner unit Scanner left cover a YA p A MA MUM 4 MUM M M Mg a HH Upper left cover Figure 1 6 29 Inverter wire guide pla
268. lay Description CONVEY SPEED DP magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction LEAD EDGE ADJ DP leading edge registration TRAIL EDGE ADJ DP trailing edge registration DP CENTER DP original center line DP AMARGIN DP scanning margin A side DP B MARGIN DP scanning margin B side DP C MARGIN DP scanning margin C side DP D MARGIN DP scanning margin D side If a problem occurs during auto adjustment DATA XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and operation stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items Completion Press the stop clear key after auto adjustment is complete The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed If the stop clear key is pressed during auto adjustment adjustment stops and no settings are changed Adjusting exposure in toner economy mode Description Adjusts the image density in the eco print mode Purpose To increase or decrease the image density in the eco print mode Method Press the start key The screen for adjustment is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Exposure is toner economy mode 12 to 0 6 Increasing the setting makes the image darker decreasing it makes the image lighter 2 Press th
269. log image data Odd Leven S H IC U16 Printer data Printing data VTC r a U22 BUF XIO U14 15 Detection signal input Control signal output Driver 2FD 2FF 2F Operation unit PCB LCD Compact Flash Fax board CCD PCB Printer board Scanner drive PCB LSU High voltage transformer PCB Paper feed unit Drum unit Developing unit Fixing unit DP Job separator Built in finisher Control signal output Driver Booklet stitcher Figure 2 3 3 Main PCB block diagram 3000 sheet finisher 1000 sheet finisher G Optional 2 3 5 2FD 2FF 2FG The main PCB MPCB consists of the main CPU and operation unit CPU The main CPU U8 communicates with other PCBs the image processing system and the engine drive system The operation unit CPU U26 controls the LCD display and the entire operation section The main CPU U8 operates on an 8 bit bus It uses the SRAM U11 and U56 for work memory and FLASH U9 for backup memory In accordance with the control program in the main CPU FLASH U7 the main CPU U8 communicates with the operation unit CPU and optional devices via the serial communication function in the CPU and XIO U14 and U15 The main CPU U8 controls the CCD PCB CCDPCB which is for image input control and the LSU which is for image output control via the image processing ASIC MIP U21 and drives the machine conveys pap
270. loosely M4x6 binding screws 19 Insert the guide rail into the rail fixing plate Rail fixing plate and secure it using an M4 x 6 binding screw at the position where the screw hole in it and that in the rail fixing plate meet Note When installing the switchback unit Figure 1 3 52 use screw hole 3 in the guide rail when not installing the switchback unit use screw hole b in the guide rail 3 M4 x6 binding screw Screw hole a Guide rail Figure 1 3 53 20 Adjust the position of the rail fixing plate so M4 x 6 that the gap between the plate and the floor is binding screws approximately 8 0 mm and then tighten the Rail fixing plate two loosely fitted M4 x 6 binding screws 8 0 mm M4 x6 binding screws Figure 1 3 54 1 3 26 2FD 2FF 2FG 21 Fit the eject tray to the finisher by hooking the two claws and secure it using two M4 x 6 binding screws M4x6 binding screws Figure 1 3 55 22 Open the front panel and insert the stapler unit into the finisher When inserting the stapler unit into the finisher be sure to grasp the upper portion shaft of the stapler unit as shown in the illustration If the plate in the middle portion stay transport is grasped the unit may be deformed resulting in paper jams 23 Close the front panel Stay transport Z ae Laat E VAST EE SEL L s Finisher Front panel Figure 1 3 56 Ins
271. ls and may cause electric shock if handled improperly na Po G ACAUTION Wear safe clothing If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties make sure they are A safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine Keep away from chains and belts AN e Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot A Check that the fixing unit thermistor heat and press rollers are clean Dirt on them can cause Q abnormally Mgh hin TEE e Do not remove the ozone filter if any from the copier except for routine replacement S Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high voltage components when removing them always hold the plug itself ue Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped If necessary protect it with a S cable cover or other appropriate item ENEE e Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks o e Remove toner completely from electronic components nne A e Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged Q e After maintenance always check that all the parts screws connectors and wires that were removed have been refitted correctly Special attention should
272. lt Setting Counter key Numeric key 9 Touch panel Brightness adjustment control dial Copier key Indicator lamp Printer key Indicator lamp 3 Scanner key Indicator lamp Fax key Indicator lamp 9 Auto Selection key Indicator lamp Job Build key Indicator lamp Repeat Copy key Indicator lamp Job Queue key Indicator lamp Document Management key Indicator lamp GO Power key Indicator lamp Main power Indicator lamp Only for metric specifications 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 1 3 Machine cross section sy Light path Paper path Figure 1 1 3 Machine cross section Paper feed sect
273. m non detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of rear stapler motor clockwise reverse rotation The rear stapler connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The rear stapler malfunctions a The rear sta pler is blocked with a staple b The rear sta pler is broken a Remove the front stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the stapling sec tion of the stapler b Replace the front stapler and check for correct operation Defective finisher main PCB Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation Booklet stitcher paper ejection mo tor problem A problem is de tected with the paper ejection motor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher elevation motor problem A problem is de tected with the elevation motor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher rear jog motor problem A problem is de tected with the rear jog motor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher front jog motor problem A problem is de tected with the front jog motor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher staple motor prob lem A problem is de tected with the staple motor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher batch processing motor problem A p
274. maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Problem Causes check procedures 2FD 2FF 2FG Corrective measures S A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from paper feeder upper drawer Jam code 12 Check if the desk upper paper feed clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U247 and select the desk upper paper feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the desk upper paper feed clutch Check 6 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from paper feeder lower drawer Jam code 13 Paper in the paper feeder lower drawer is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pulley separation pulley or forwarding pulley of the paper feeder lower drawer are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken desk feed switch actuator Check visually and replace desk feed switch if its actuator is bro ken Defective desk feed Switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the desk main PCB check if CN2 7 on the desk main PCB remains low when the desk feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the desk feed Switch Check if the desk
275. mately 10 times in the horizontal direction to stir toner 4 Gently push the toner container into the copier along the rails Push the container all the way into the copier until it locks in place 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Toner container Figure 1 3 7 Toner container Figure 1 3 8 Toner container Figure 1 3 9 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 I 34 Install the toner disposal tank 1 Install the toner disposal tank in the copier 2 Close the front cover Toner disposal tank Figure 1 3 10 t Connect the power cord 1 Connect the power cord to the connector on the copier 2 Insert the power plug into the wall outlet I 34 Carry out initial developer setting maintenance item U130 1 Turn the main switch on and enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys 2 Enter 130 using the numeric keys and press the start key 3 Press the start key to execute the maintenance item The drive stops within approximately 5 minutes 4 Press the stop clear key m Load paper 1 Load paper in the drawer m Output an own status report maintenance item U000 1 Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key 2 Select MAINTENANCE and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items 3 Press the stop clear key I Exit maintenance mode 1 Enter 001 usi
276. mbols such as hyphens and parentheses select as required from the symbols displayed on the touch panel as shown below To move the cursor press Left or Right in the bottom row Space Left Right 2 Press the start key The phone number is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Displaying the machine number Description Displays the machine number Purpose To check the machine number Method Press the start key The currently machine number is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 15 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U005 Copying without paper Description Simulates the copy operation without paper feed Purpose To check the overall operation of the machine Method 1 2 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Select the item to be operated The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Operation PPG Only the copier operates PPC DP Both the copier and DP operate continuous operation Press the interrupt key The copy mode screen is displayed Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen Changes in th
277. me from power on to stabilization of fixing Fixing temperature decrease amount br duplex copying Fixing temperature decrease amount br duplex copying for copy store section optional mail box ejection Fixing correct temperature for large size copying Fixing correct temperature for middle size copying Fixing correct temperature for small size copying Fixing temperature increase amount at low temperature and low humidity Fixing temperature decrease amount at high temperature and high humidity Variable range of correct temperature for fixing heater M Stabilizing fixing forcibly Resetting the fixing problem data Checking fixing counts Turning the fixing heater on Setting the fixing phase control Checking the fixing temperature Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Section Operation panel and support equipment Mode setting Maintenance item contents Turning all LEDs on Initializing the touch panel Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Checking DP operation Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender Checking the operation panel keys Setting the paper size for the large paper deck Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built in finisher Setting finisher stack quantity Checking the operation of the DP motors solenoids and clutch Checking the DP switches Checking message
278. ms of pa per feed clutch 1 PFCL1 turning on No paper feed from pa per feeder upper drawer Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within 880 ms of the desk upper paper feed clutch DPFCL U turning on the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within 880 ms No paper feed from pa per feeder lower drawer Desk feed switch DFSW does not turn on within 880 ms of the desk lower paper feed clutch DPFCL L turning on the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within 880 ms No paper feed from by pass The bypass feed switch BYPFSW does not turn on within 1730 ms of the bypass paper feed clutch BYPPFCL turning on the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within 1730 ms Jam in large paper deck horizontal paper convey ing section 1 Paper path sensor 3 PPSENS3 does not turn on within 290 ms of the paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 turning on Jam in large paper deck horizontal paper convey ing section 2 Paper path sensor 2 PPSENS2 does not turn on within 310 ms of the paper path sensor 3 PPSENS3 turning on Jam in large paper deck horizontal paper convey ing section 3 Paper path sensor 1 PPSENS1 does not turn on within 190 ms of the paper path sensor 2 PPSENS2 turning on Misfeed in copier vert
279. n KYOCERA MITA NORGE Postboks 150 Oppsal NO 0619 Oslo Olaf Helsetsvei 6 NO 0694 Oslo Norway Phone 47 0 22 62 73 00 KYOCERA MITA DANMARK A S Slotsmarken 11 2 DK 2970 Horsholm Denmark Phone 45 7022 3880 KYOCERA MITA PORTUGAL LDA Rua do Centro Cultural no 41 1700 106 Lisbon Portugal Phone 351 0 21 843 6780 KYOCERA MITA SOUTH AFRICA PTY LTD 527 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park Midrand South Africa Phone 27 0 11 540 2600 KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 U S A Phone 973 808 8444 KYOCERA MITA AUSTRALIA PTY LTD Level 3 6 10 Talavera Road North Ryde N S W 2113 Australia Phone 02 9888 9999 KYOCERA MITA NEW ZEALAND LTD 1 3 Parkhead Place Albany P O Box 302 125 NHPC Auckland New Zealand Phone 09 415 4517 KYOCERA MITA THAILAND CORP LTD 9 209 Ratchada Prachachem Road Bang Sue Bangkok 10800 Thailand Phone 02 586 0320 KYOCERA MITA SINGAPORE PTE LTD 121 Genting Lane 3rd Level Singapore 349572 Phone 67418733 KYOCERA MITA HONG KONG LIMITED 11 F Mita Centre 552 566 Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan New Territories Hong Kong Phone 24297422 KYOCERA MITA TAIWAN Corporation 7F 1 2 No 41 Lane 221 Gangchi Rd Neihu District Taipei Taiwan 114 R O C Phone 02 87511560 KYOCERA MITA Corporation 2 28 1 chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 06 6764 3
280. n motor 2 Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 2 connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none repair or replace the cable 10 Cooling fan motor 3 does not operate Broken cooling fan motor 3 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace cooling fan motor 3 Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 3 connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none repair or replace the cable 11 Cooling fan motor 4 does not operate Broken cooling fan motor 4 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace cooling fan motor 4 Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 4 connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none repair or replace the cable 1 5 47 2FD 2FF 2FG Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 12 Cooling fan motor 5 does not operate Broken cooling fan motor 5 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace cooling fan motor 5 Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 5 connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none repair or replace the cable 13 Cooling fan motor 6 does not operate Broken cooling fan motor 6 coil Check for continuity acros
281. n a notch hole of the copier 4 While pressing the Copier key turn on the power switch and connect the power plug Press and hold on the Copier key until the message Please wait disappears 5 Enter the maintenance item 6 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 7 Select the item The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description SRAM CF FAX DATA Writing the backup data of fax control PCB CF SRAM FAX DATA Reading the backup data of fax control PCB SRAM gt CF FAX DIAL Writing the backup data of fax dial information CFSRAM FAX DIAL Reading the backup data of fax dial information 8 Press the start key Reading or writing is executed and the screen displays the result f the operation was successful EXECUTE 0100 CODE 0000 If the operation failed EXECUTE 0100 CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 below 9 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug 10 Remove the Compact Flash from the copier Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 Meaning Detects call for service on fax control PCB Communication error Detects call for service on main PCB CF error No CF card No data in CF card CF data is incompatible Bad CF data Checksum error CF read error CF write error Fax control PCB flash memory error
282. n is indi cated during copy ing jam in fixing section Jam codes 40 to 44 46 and 47 Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 5 49 20 A paper jam in the eject section is indi cated during copy ing jam in eject section Jam code 50 Broken eject switch actua tor Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is bro ken Defective eject switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and off manually Replace the eject switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse 21 A paper jam in the eject section is indi cated during copy ing jam in job sepa rator eject section Jam code 51 Broken feedshift switch actuator Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is broken Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken job separator eject switch actuator Check visually and replace the job separator eject switch if its actuator is broken Defective
283. n motor starts the motor does not become stable even after 20 s Poor contact in the polygon motor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective polygon motor Replace the LSU see page 1 6 20 Defective power source PCB Check if 24 V DC is supplied to YC2 1 on the main PCB If not replace the power source PCB Defective main PCB Check if 24 V DC is output from YC8 10 on the main PCB If not replace the main PCB Polygon motor steady state problem When high speed rotation from low speed rotation is requested the motor does not become stable even after 20 S Poor contact in the polygon motor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective polygon motor Replace the LSU see page 1 6 20 Defective power source PCB Check if 24 V DC is supplied to YC2 1 on the main PCB If not replace the power source PCB Defective main PCB Check if 24 V DC is output from YC8 10 on the main PCB If not replace the main PCB BD steady state problem The VTC detects a BD error for 600 ms after the polygon motor rotation has been stabilized Defective laser diode Replace the LSU see page 1 6 20 Defective polygon motor Replace the LSU see page
284. nal interface mounting plate Film Figure 1 3 115 FAX PCB Power cable Auxiliary power source PCB assembly Figure 1 3 116 Green positive Auxiliary power source connector PCB assembly Small white positive connector White positive connector Figure 1 3 117 11 Fit the catch on the auxiliary power unit into the mount hole in the copier and fasten the auxiliary power unit into place with one M3 x 06 chrome binding screw 12 Through the opening of controller box above the speaker connect the FAX PCB Power cable on the auxiliary power source PCB assembly to connector YC8 on the fax board 13 Connect the 2 pin connector to the 2 pin connector with green cable 14 Unlock YC1 on the fax board by pulling its connector housing 15 Hold the fax cable with its conductive side facing up insert it into connector YC1 then push the housing back in to lock the connector 16 Hold the other end of the fax cable with its conductive side facing down and connect it to connector YC44 on the main PCB Pull the YC44 housing out to release the connector lock then insert the cable and then push the housing back in Important Be sure to push the fax cable all the way in and be sure that the connection is straight A poor connection may result ina variety of problems 2FD 2FF 2FG M3 x 06 chrome binding screw gt Catch Mount hole Figure 1 3 118 Opening E Fax
285. necessary Fixing unit ther mostat triggered Check for continuity If none replace the fixing unit thermostat Fixing unit heater M or S installed incorrectly Check and reinstall if necessary Broken fixing unit heater M or S wire Check for continuity If none replace the fixing unit heater M or S Optional Contents 2FD 2FF 2FG Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Zero crossing signal problem The main PCB does not detect the zero crossing signal Z CROSS SIG for the time specified below At power on 5 s Others 5 s Poor contact in the connector terminals Check the connection of connectors YC1 3 on the main PCB and YC2 6 on the power source PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective power source PCB Check if the zero crossing signal is output from YC2 6 on the power source PCB If not replace the power source PCB Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB if C6400 is detected while YC2 6 on the power source PCB outputs the zero crossing signal Fixing unit connector insertion prob lem Absence of the fixing unit is detected Fixing unit con nector inserted incorrectly Reinsert the fixing unit connector if neces sary Defective fixing unit connector Replace the fixing unit Fixing unit fuse cut problem The fixing temperature remains at 0 C
286. nformation and then press the Mgt Inf Correction key 3 Select ID code and then press the Change key 4 Press the Clear key to delete the old ID code 5 Enter the new ID code up to 8 digits using the numeric keys 6 Select Name to display and then press the Change key 7 Press the AllDel key to delete the old department name then enter the new name 8 Press the End key Note This setting is only available when the optional printer board or network printer board is installed in the copier Printer error report Note This setting is only available when the optional printer board or network printer board is installed in the copier Non standard printer driver printout printer Note This setting is only available when the optional printer board or network printer board is installed in the copier Copy Printer output management Check all departments Checks the total number of copies made under all department ID codes as a whole print out a copy management report and clear the copy counts for all of the registered department ID codes 1 Press the Management total key The total number of copies made under all department ID codes as a whole will be displayed 2 Press the Print report key The copy management report is printed out 3 Press the Counter clear key to clear all of the copy counts 4 Press the
287. ng DUP DOWN TEMP2 Fixing temperature decrease amount O to 20 C 0 for duplex copying for copy store section optional mail box ejection The respective temperatures are to be set such that 2NDTEMP 2 1ST TEMP 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting the fixing correct temperature 1 Select the item to be set The selecting item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting COPY UP TEMP L Fixing correct temperature 30 to 100 C 45 30 cpm for large size copying 50 40 cpm 65 50 cpm COPY UP TEMP M Fixing correct temperature 30 to 100 C E 30 cpm for middle size copying 0 40 cpm 70 50 cpm COPY UP TEMP S Fixing correct temperature 30 to 100 C for small size copying 50 cpm 2 4 4 5 L L UP TEMP Fixing temperature increase amount 0 to 20 C at low temperature and low humidity H H DOWN TEMP Fixing temperature decrease amount 0 to 20 C 0 at high temperature and high humidity MH OFF UP TEMP Variable range of correct temperature 10 to 10 0 for fixing heater M If the fixing offset occurs by over heat of fixing temperature decrease the value of MH OFF UP TEMP to lower the temperature of fixing heater M 3 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in
288. ng there should be no difference between respective values Any differences between the values at machine front and rear indicates that scanner problem causes the fixing unevenness If the displayed results indicate no shading problems the fixing unevenness uneven copy density is caused by factors other than in the scanner section shading or CCD Ifa black line appears the cause may assumed to be based on the results of the scanning operation before shading if a white line appears they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation after shading Note that depending on the thickness and location of the black or white line it may not be possible to use this method to determine the cause This is because the displayed values obtained from scanning at the limit of nine points are insufficient to provide significant information 20 mm from the machine left 200 mm from the machine left 400 mm from the machine left 100 mm from the Machine center 100 mm from the machine center machine center toward machine toward machine front rear Figure 1 4 4 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for entering a maintenance item is displayed 1 4 31 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U092 1 4 32 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Makes auto scanner
289. ng direction decreasing the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorte in the auxiliary scanning direction EJECT MOTOR Normally no change is necessary but this can be used as countermeasures against wrinkles waving of paper 3 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy mode Correct values for an A3 11 x 17 output are A 300 1 5 mm B 260 1 0 mm Figure 1 4 1 Adjustment 1 Output an A3 11 x 17 VTC pattern in interrupt mode 2 Measure A and B on the VTC pattern Figure 1 4 1 and perbrm the following adjustments if they are different from the correct sizes A Drive motor speed adjustment B Polygon motor speed adjustment Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description Adjusting the scanner input properties Description Adjusts the image scanning density in text text and photo or photo mode Purpose Used when the entire image appears too dark or light Method Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Image scanning density 1 to 23 12 Increasing the setting males the density
290. ng sec tion Jam code 22 Optional 1 5 14 Broken feed switch 1 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken feed switch 2 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 2 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Broken feed switch 3 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 3 if its actuator is broken Problem Causes check procedures 2FD 2FF 2FG Corrective measures 15 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in copier ver tical conveying sec tion Jam code 22 Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the feed pulleys and feed roller are de formed Check and repair if necessary 16 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in bypas
291. ng the numeric keys and press the start key The machine exits the maintenance mode I 34 Print out the user setting list 1 Press the key to enter default setting and press the Print form key The counter report will be output m Make test copies 1 Place an original and make test copies Completion of the machine installation 1 3 7 1 This page is intentionally left Hank 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 1 3 2 Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows Maintenance Contents Factory setting item No U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count U254 Turning auto start function on off ON U255 Setting auto clear time 90s U258 Switching copy operation at toner SINGLE MODE 70 empty detection U260 Changing the copy count timing After ejection U264 Setting the display order of the date Inch specifications MONTH DATE YEAR Metric specifications DATE MONTH YEAR U277 Setting auto application change time 30s U331 Switching the finisher eject section OFF U342 Setting the ejection restriction ON U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode OFF U344 Setting preheat energy saver mode ENERGY STAR 1 3 8 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 3 Installing the key counter option Key counter installation requires the following parts Key counter set P N 2A369703 Contents of the set Key counter cover P N 2A360010
292. nnector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective paper feed motor rota tion control circuit Replace the paper feed motor Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Deck conveying motor desk drive motor problem No pulse is input within 500 ms of the start up No pulse is input within 100 ms of the previous pulse input Defective deck conveying motor PCB desk drive motor PCB Replace the deck conveying motor PCB desk drive motor PCB and check for cor rect operation Deck conveying motor desk drive motor does not rotate correctly the motor is over loaded Check the gears and remedy if necessary Poor contact in the deck convey ing motor desk drive motor con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable 1 5 28 Scanner carriage problem The home position is not correct when the power is turned on or at the start of copying using the bypass ta ble Poor contact in the connector ter minals Check the connection of connector YC37 on the main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective scanner home position Switch Repla
293. nt cover is opened Upper paper switch PPSW U Detects the presence of paper in the upper drawer Lower paper switch PPSW L Detects the presence of paper in the lower drawer Upper lift limit switch LICSW U Detects the upper drawer lift reaching the upper limit Lower lift limit switch LICSW L Detects the lower drawer lift reaching the upper limit Upper paper size length switch a OD Detects the length of paper in the upper drawer Lower paper size length switch PLSW D EE Detects the length of paper in the lower drawer Upper paper size width switch PWSW U ooo sasa uandaa panpana Detects the width of paper in the upper drawer Lower paper size width switch ld EE EE Detects the width of paper in the lower drawer Bypass paper switch BYPPSW Detects the presence of paper on the bypass tray Bypass paper size length switch BYPPESW Q asul uuu aus Detects the length of paper on the bypass tray 2 2 2 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 2FD 2FF 2FG Bypass paper size width switch IEN d AE AE Detects the width of paper on the bypass tray Feed switch 1 FSW1 Controls feed clutch 1 drive timing Feed switch 2 FSW2 Controls feed clutch 2 drive timing Feed switch 3 FSW3
294. ntact glass Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the cleaning blade Dirty drum separation claws Clean the drum separation claws Dirty the heat roller separation claws 10 Image is blurred Causes Causes Clean the heat roller separation claws 1 Scanner moves erratically 2 Deformed press roller 3 Paper conveying section drive problem Check procedures corrective measures 1 Scanner moves erratically Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails If any remove it 2 Deformed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 6 63 3 Paper conveying section drive problem 11 The leading edge of Causes Check the gears and belts and if necessary grease them the image is consist 1 Misadjusted leading edge registration ently misaligned with 2 Misadjusted scanner leading edge the original registration Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 Misadjusted leading edge registration Readjust the leading edge registration see pages 1 6 17 2 Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration Readjust the scanner leading edge registration see page 1 6 17 1 5 42 2FD 2FF 2FG 12 The leading edge of Causes the image is sporadi 1 Feed clutch paper feed clutch bypass paper cally misaligned with feed clutch or registration clutch installed or the original oper
295. ntenance item is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed Setting the number of days after which to automatically delete documents Description Sets the number of days to save documents on the HDD before automatically deleting Purpose To change the number of days to retain data that is saved within the auto delete area of the HDD before automatically deleting Method Press the start key The current setting is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Number of days after which to automatically delete documents 0 to 7 days T 2 Press the start key The value is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the laser scanner unit type Description Sets the type of the laser scanner unit according to the label stuck on the laser scanner unit Moreover changes output power of the laser scanner unit Purpose To set the type when the laser scanner unit control is changed Also if reproducibility of half tone is not proper this mode is used to increase the output power of the laser scanner unit to increas
296. o perform 4 1 Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit page 1 6 22 first Before making the following adjustment output a VTC PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment Procedure Correct image Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Place the original Figure 1 6 50 on the contact glass Press the start key and make a test copy at 100 magnification Refit the contact glass Remove the contact glass and adjust the lateral squareness of the ISU by rotating the pin For copy example 1 rotate the pin in the direction of the black arrow mb For copy example 2 rotate the pin in the direction of the white arrow 5 gt Is the image correct End Figure 1 6 51 1 6 25 2FD 2FF 2FG 7 Adjusting the longitudinal squareness reference Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed longitudinal squareness not obtained Caution Adjust the amount of slack in the paper page 1 6 14 first Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image and if it is not obtained perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment Before making the following adjustment output a VTC PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment Procedure Place the original on the contact glass a test copy at 10096 magnification Press the s
297. oes re place the paper conveying switch Check if the feedshift roller or press roller is deformed Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed 34 Paper jams in the built in finisher dur ing copying jam during paper con veying for batch ejection 2 Jam code 84 Optional Defective paper conveying Switch With 5 V DC present at CN4 9 on the finisher main PCB check if CN4 10 on the finisher main PCB remains high or low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it does re place the paper conveying switch Check if the eject roller or eject pulley is deformed Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed 1 5 19 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 5 2 Self diagnosis 1 Self diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self diagnostic function When a problem is detected copying is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number between 0030 and 8500 indicating the nature of the problem A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service After removing the problem the self diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches 1 or 2 off and back on Call for service A 012345678901234 C2000 Figure 1 5 2 Service call code display List of system errors When an unexpected error is detected for some reason a system error will be indicated After a system error is indicated the error c
298. oes not Operate A 1 5 48 15 The upper paper feed clutch does not operate uu 1 5 48 16 The lower paper feed clutch does not operate u u 1 5 48 17 Feed clutch 1 does not oper te ient tenete te tii brace iu tette arniipedce 1 5 48 18 Feed clutch 2 doesnot operate sai seis RAW hain eee 1 5 48 19 Feed clutch 3 does not operate rite nonet tn nier iadaa taaa iaaio aroei 1 5 49 20 The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate ss m 1 5 49 21 The bypass feed clutch does not operate u eene 1 5 49 22 The registration clutch does not operate eseeseseeeeseeeeeanee aa T tnr aiaei 1 5 49 23 The duplex feed clutch does not operate J l u uu uu 1 5 49 24 The feedshift solenoid does not operate l u u u 1 5 49 25 The toner feed solenoid does not operate l l l nennen natn tna 1 5 50 26 The cleaning lamp do68S not Hiert Ori eot retener inei E eripe steak saben ATAS 1 5 50 27 The exposure lamp does not turn on uuu esses nne nnt deii eraa aiaiai 1 5 50 28 The exposure lamp does not turn off ENEE 1 5 50 29 The fixing heater does not turn on C6000 ssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeenneenenennne nennen 1 5 50 1 5 5 2FD 2FF 2FG 30 The birni
299. olenoids or clutch in the optional DP on Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors solenoids and clutch Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item to be operated The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts Display Motors solenoids and clutch Operation In operation F MOT Original feed motor OFM In operation C MOT Original paper conveying motor OCM On for 0 5 s FD CL Original feed clutch OFCL On for 0 5 s EJ SL Eject feedshift solenoid EFSSOL On for 0 5 s RJ SL Switchback feedshift solenoid SBFSSOL On for 0 5 s FD SL Original feed solenoid OFSOL On and off RP SL Switchback pressure solenoid SBPSOL On and off 3 To turn each motor off press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key when operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional DP Purpose To check if respective switches in the optional DP operate correctly Start 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the type of switches SW or VR to be checked The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Type of switches SW On off switches VR Volume switch Method for the on off switches 1 Turn the respective switches on and off manuall
300. on the main tray and on the intermediate tray in the optional finisher Purpose To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description MAIN TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the main tray MIDDLE TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the intermediate tray for sort copying or staple copying Setting the number of sheets of stack on the main tray 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Setting Description 0 3000 sheet finisher 3000 sheets built in finisher 500 sheets 1 3000 sheet finisher 1500 sheets built in finisher 250 sheets Initial setting 0 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the number of sheets of stack on the intermediate tray for sort copying or staple copying 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Setting Description 0 For sort copying 30 sheets for staple copying 50 sheets 1 For sort copying 30 sheets for staple copying 30 sheets Initial setting 0 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selectiong a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors solenoids and clutch Description Turns the motors s
301. operation Purpose To operate when image flow occurs Method 1 Press the start key The screen br executing is displayed 2 Press the start key Drum refresh operation starts approximately 3 minutes 3 To stop the operation press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key when the operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting separation charger mode Description Specifies Separation Charger SC Whole mode to ON OFF and the temperature humidity of which SCWhole mode is ON Purpose If the paper wrinkles from causes other than law temperature or low humidity 20 C 50 RH or less change the temperature humidity If the fixing offset occurs switch SC Whole mode to OFF Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item to be set and press the stat key The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description SELECT SC WHOLE MODE Specifying SC Whole mode to ON OFF SELECT TEMP HUM Specifying the temperature humidity of which SC Whole mode in ON SC Whole mode turns ON when the temperature humidity becomes the preset value or less SELECT VELLUM MODE Specifying SC Whole mode to ON OFF when using thin paper SELECT NORMAL MODE Specifying SC Whole mode to ON OFF when using plain paper Setting SELECT SC WHOLE MODE Select either ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON
302. or 1 s or longer Paper deck motor 2 does not rotate correctly the mo tor is overloaded Check the gears and remedy if necessary Paper deck motor 2 connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Deck right lift position problem Deck level switch 2 does not turn on within 30 s of paper deck motor 2 turning on Defective deck level switch 2 Check if CN5 4 on the desk main PCB goes low when desk level switch 2 is turned off If not replace desk level switch 2 Poor contact of deck level switch 2 connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Defective paper deck motor 2 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper desk motor 2 Poor contact of paper deck motor 2 connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable The deck right lift does not rise properly Check the gears and belts and remedy if necessary Deck left lift position problem Deck level switch 1 does not turn on within 30 s of paper deck motor 1 turning on Defective deck level switch 1 Check if CN5 7 on the desk main PCB goes low when desk level switch 1 is turned off If not replace des
303. or selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the device to be checked Display Paper feed device 3000 DECK Large paper deck 500 x 2 DECK Paper feeder Method 1 Select the item to be operated The selected item is displayed in reverse and operation starts Large paper deck Display Motors and clutches Operation LCF MOT Conveying motor CM On for 5 s B CL Conveying clutch CCL On for 1 s PCL1 Paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 On for 1s PCL2 Paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 On for 1s Paper feeder Display Motors and clutches Operation DESK MOT Desk Drive motor DDM On for 5s FEED CL Desk feed clutch DFCL On for 1 s UPP CL Desk upper paper feed clutch DPFCL U On for 1 s LOW CL Desk lower paper feed clutch DPFCL L On for 1 s 2 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear ley Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 51 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U249 Checking the paper ejection to optional devices Description Ejects paper to an optional mailbox or job separator or to the ejection slot at the machine left Purpose To check paper conveying operation to optional paper eject devices or the ejection slot at the machine left Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the paper eject location Di
304. original and press the start key to make a test copy Is the image correct Press the stop clear key to exit maintenance mode 111 Original Copy Copy example example 2 Figure 1 6 54 Press the start key The new setting is stored For copy example 1 increase the value using the cursor up key For copy example 2 decrease the value using the cursor down key Setting range 25 25 Initial setting 0 Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0 1 Increasing the value makes the image wider and decreasing it makes the image narrower 1 6 27 2FD 2FF 2FG 9 Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct 059 EEN ES po Oro P 1 4 22 direction P 1 6 27 direction P 1 4 25 Caution Before making the following adjustment ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode Procedure Start Y Enter maintenance mode Y Original Copy Copy Enter 065 using the numeric keys example 1 example 2 Y Figure 1 6 55 Press the start key Select SUB SCAN ADJ auxiliary scanning direction Y Press the interrupt key Press the start key y The new setting Place an original and press is stored the start key to make a test copy
305. ounts Description Displays fixing counts Purpose To check fixing counts after replacing the fixing unit Method Press the start key The fixing counts are displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Turning the fixing heater on Description Turns the fixing heater M or S on Purpose To check fixing heaters tuming on Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the heater to be tumed on The selected heater tums on for 3 s and then tums off Display Description MAIN Fixing heater M FH M SUB Fixing heater S FH S Completion Press the stop clear key when fixing motors M and S are off The screen for selecting the maintenance item Na is displayed 1 4 41 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 42 Description Setting the fixing phase control Description Sets the use of fixing phase control to reduce electical noise generated by the copier Purpose Normally no change is necessary If electrical noise generated by the copier causes flickering of the lights around the copier select fixing phase control to reduces the noise Method Press the start key The screen for adjustment is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Fixing phase control present OFF Fixing phase control absent Initial setting OFF 2 If you select ON us
306. ow Vp p Difference between the maximum and the minimum of applied voltage 1 72 kV fixed Vf Frequency Typically 2 6 kHz This value varies depending on th preset value of the drum surface potential and the environmental correction Can be adjusted with the maintenance item U101 Duty Ratio of time where voltage is applied in a cycle Typically 45 This value varies depending on the preset value of the drum surface potential and the environmental correction Can be adjusted with the maintenance item U101 Vde Developing shift bias potential 160 V Can be changed to 180 V with the maintenance item U101 D Supplementation V0 Drum surface potential on non image area area not exposed to light VL Drum surface potential on image area area exposed to light 2 1 16 Vo Vdc VL Figure 2 1 19 Developing bias waveform 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 1 5 Transfer and separation sections The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller separation electrode and drum separation claws A high voltage generated by the high voltage transformer PCB HVTPCB is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging 100 pA aper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high voltage transformer PCB HVTPCB to the separation electrode 60 or 10 pA depending on the paper Drum separation claw
307. ower switch 24 Take the alphabet labels from the fax lit label sheet and adhere them above the corresponding numeric keys on the operation panel In Asia use the PQRS TUV WXYZ label and do not use the PRS TUV WXZ and OPER labels 25 Connect the L terminal to the phone circuit using a modular connector cable Important On 120 V systems use the included modular connector cable to make the connection 1 8 54 K Main switch E oO sls Power label H3 Figure 1 3 127 Alphabet labels zm O wO 622 000 Figure 1 3 128 L terminal o BG d Modular connector cable M A 9 AI Figure 1 3 129 Initialization procedure after installation of facsimile system 1 Insert the copier power plug to the wall outlet and turn the power switch on 2 Run maintenance item U601 3 Enter a destination code using the numeric keys refer to the destination code list and then press the start key Enter a destination code with three digits 2FD 2FF 2FG Code Destination Code Destination Code Destination 000 Japan 159 South Africa 253 Sweden 009 Australia 169 Thailand France 080 Hong Kong 181 U S A Austria 084 Indonesia 242 South America Switzerland 088 Israel 243 Saudi Arabia Belgium
308. ower switch off and disconnect the power plug Remove the middle right cover Insert it with its rear side toward the front side of the machine Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the copier Insert the power plug and turn the power switch on Upgrading firmware starts for 3 minutes Caution Never turn the main switch off during upgrading Completed is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug Remove Compact Flash from the copier and refit the middle right cover Insert the power plug and turn the power switch on 2FD 2FF 2FG Notch hole NS 3 1 ee Figure 1 7 1 gz 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 7 2 Adjustment free variable resistors VR The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field High voltage transformer PCB VR42 VR201 VR204 VR205 Inverter PCB VR1 VR2 1 7 3 Remarks on main PCB replacement When replacing the main PCB remove EEPROM 1 to 4 from the main PCB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PCB EEPROM4 EEPROM3 EEPROM1 EEPROM2 Figure 1 7 2 1 7 2 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 7 4 Upgrading the printer board firmware Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware on the optional printer board Firmware upgrading requires the following tools Compact Flash Products manufactured by SAND
309. pass feed switch actuator Check visually and replace the bypass feed switch if its actuator is broken Defective bypass feed switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the bypass feed switch on and off manually Replace the bypass feed switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the upper paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the upper paper feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the upper paper feed clutch Check see page 1 5 48 Check if the lower paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the lower paper feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the lower paper feed clutch Check see page 1 5 48 Check if the bypass paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the bypass paper feed clutch Check see page 1 5 49 Check if the feed pulleys and feed roller are de formed Check and repair if necessary 15 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in copier ver tical conveyi
310. per feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the upper paper feed clutch Check see page 1 5 48 1 5 9 2FD 2FF 2FG Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 3 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from lower drawer Jam code 11 Paper in the lower drawer is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the lower paper feed pulley separation pulley or forwarding pulley of the lower drawer are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 2 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 2 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the lower paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the lower paper feed clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the lower paper feed clutch Check see page 1 5 48 4 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from large pa per deck Jam code 12 Paper in the large paper deck is extremely curled
311. per size 1 to 5 Press the Management Def Set key 2 Select one of the Total size 1 through Total size 5 settings and then press the Change key 3 Press the On key 4 Press the Select size key 5 Press the key that corresponds to the desired paper size and then press the Close key 6 To specify a paper type as well press the Select paper type key 7 Press the key that corresponds to the desired paper type and then press the Close key Sets the number of exposure steps for the manual exposure mode 1 Select Exposure steps and then press the Change key 2 Select 1 step or 0 5 step key Original quality Sets the default mode for the image quality 1 Select Original image quality Image quality Original and then press the Change key 2 Select Text Photo Photo or Text key Eco print mode ON OFF Determines whether or not the eco print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode 1 Select Eco Print and then press the Change key 2 Select On or Off key Background exposure adjustment Adjust the ground color of the copied paper 1 Select Background exp adj and then press the Change key 2 Adjust the exposure using the Lighter key or the Darker key Setting range 2 to 2 Paper selection Sets whether the copier will automati
312. per size A4 B5 or LETTER The selected item is displayed in reverse Initial setting LETTER Inch specifications A4 Metric specifications 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 45 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U236 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built in finisher Description If the machine is equipped with an optional built in finisher this mode sets whether A5 5 2 x 81 2 size paper is output to the machine internal tray or not Purpose If the machine is equipped with an optional built in finisher and if paper jams occur due to curling of paper in the built in ejection section when two sided copying onto A5 51 2 x 81 2 size paper is performed this mode is used to change the setting to ON to disable ejection to the machine internal tray Method Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Does not eject to the machine internal tray OFF Eject to the machine internal tray Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 46 Setting finisher stack quantity Description Sets the number of sheets of each stack
313. power plug Press and hold on the Copier key until the message Please wait disappears Enter the maintenance item Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Select FAX PROGRAM FONT Check that EXECUTE is displayed and then press the start key Downloading of the fax program starts and the result shown below is displayed If the operation was successful EXECUTE 0100 CHECKSUM 2 CODE 0000 If the operation failed EXECUTE 0100 CHECKSUM CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Description 8 Then downloading of the fax fonts starts and the result shown below is displayed f the operation was successful EXECUTE 0100 CHECKSUM CODE 0000 If the operation failed EXECUTE 0100 CHECKSUM CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 on page 1 4 69 9 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug 10 Remove the Compact Flash from the copier Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts Description Resets all of the counts back to zero Purpose The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once only if the count values are 1000 or less Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is
314. pply for PM Ground PM SCAN signal PM READY signal PM CLOCK signal 2FD 2FF 2FG Connector Voltage Description YC9 Connected to the BYPFSW TCS TNS developing unit TNFSOL TCDSW and drum unit DVUNITN FUSE CUT REM N C GND TNFSOL TCDSW GND PO GND CL EEDATA EESCLK GND DRUNITN 5V i O i Oa 7 O O i p a 1 Ome OOO 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 VDC Ground BYPFSW ON OFF 5 V DC supply for BYPFSW 5 V DC supply for TCS TCS ON OFF Ground Ground 5 V DC supply for TNS TNS ON OFF Ground Developing unit detection signal Developing unit FUSE CUT signal Not used Ground TNFSOL ON OFF TCDSW ON OFF Ground Ground Ground CL ON OFF Drum unit DATA signal Drum unit CLOCK signal Ground Drum unit detection signal 5 V DC supply for drum unit Not used Connected to the RSW fixing unit DUPFCL DUPPCSW and CFM 5 to 7 FUSE CUT REM GND 5V FTH2 24V DUPFCL GND DUPPCSW 5V GND SET SIG DUP PO R24V CFM5 6 7 0 5 V DC 5VDC 5VDC 0to5VDC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 0to5VDC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC Ground RSW ON OFF 5 V DC supply for RSW Ground 5 V DC supply from FTH1 FTH1 detection voltage FTH1 detection voltage Ground 5 V DC supply from FTH2 FTH2 detection voltage 24 V D
315. r cartridges into the unit 2FD 2FF 2FG Cushioning material Stapler unit Figure 1 3 162 Fastening pin e pel ue Fastening pin Stapler unit Figure 1 3 163 Stapler cartridges Stapler unit Figure 1 3 164 1 3 67 2FD 2FF 2FG 17 Lift the stapler unit further up and then lower it 18 Set the intermediate tray unit back into the finisher and close the front cover 19 Fasten the main tray to the finisher using the two fixing guide pins and the two hexagonal cap nuts 20 Hold the auxiliary tray vertically attach it to the top of the finisher and lower it toward the exit side 1 3 68 Stapler unit Figure 1 3 165 Hexagonal cap nuts Main tray Fixing me pins Figure 1 3 166 Auxiliary tray Figure 1 3 167 2FD 2FF 2FG Connecting the signal cable 1 Connect the finisher s signal cable to the connector on the rear of the copier 2 Plug the copier into a wall outlet and turn its 0 power switch on pm Connector Signal cable lt Figure 1 3 168 Adjust the punch hole centering 1 Set the machine into punch mode and make a test copy using manual feed Note Perform this check after checking that the center position of each drawer in the copier is correct 2 Check the centering of the punch holes on the test copy 3 Loosen the t
316. r conveying switch DUPPCSW does not turn off within 1285 ms of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing off Duplex paper conveying section 2 Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within 1126 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW turning on Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within 1126 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW turning off Optional DP No original feed When the DF START signal is received switches other than the original set switch OSSW and original size length switch OSLSW on the contact glass are on During the primary feed of the first original in the single sided or double sided original mode the original feed switch OFSW does not turn on within 800 ms of the original feed motor OFM turning on During the primary feed of the second or later original in the single sided or double sided original mode the original feed switch OFSW does not turn on within 800 ms of the start of forward rotation of the original feed motor OFM An original jam in the original feed conveying section During the secondary original feed in the single sided original mode the DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn on within 967 ms of the start of reverse rotation of the original feed motor OFM Alternatively during continuous original feed in single sided original mode the DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn on for the second time under the above condi tions
317. r duplex copying Cooling fan motor 7 CFM7 Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying Polygon motor DM Drives the polygon mirror 2 2 4 4 CO OO l O O1 P OQ N 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2FD 2FF 2FG Other electrical components Machine front ZZ Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2 2 4 Other electrical components Upper paper feed clutch PFCL U Primary paper feed from the upper drawer Lower paper feed clutch PFCL L Primary paper feed from the lower drawer Feed clutch 1 FCL1 Feed clutch 2 FCL2 Feed clutch 3 FCL3 Controls the drive of feed roller Controls the drive of feed roller Controls the drive of feed roller Bypass paper feed clutch BYPPFCL Primary paper feed from the bypass tray Bypass feed clutch BYPFCL Controls the drive of bypass feed roller Registration clutch RCL Secondary paper feed Duplex paper feed clutch DUPEGL E Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Operates the feedshift guide Toner feed solenoid TNFSOL Replenishes toner Exposure lamp EL esses Exposes originals Cleaning lamp CL Removes residual charge from the drum surface F
318. r key after auto adjustment is complete The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed If the stop clear key is pressed during auto adjustment adjustment stops and no settings are changed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U093 Setting the exposure density gradient Description Changes the exposure density gradient in manual density mode depending on respective image modes text text and photo photo text in fax mode photo in fax mode Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment Also used to make copy image darker or lighter Start 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the image mode to be adjusted and press the start key The screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description MIXED Density in text and photo mode TEXT Density in text mode PHOTO Density in photo mode FAX TEXT Density in the text in fax mode FAX PHOTO Density in the photo in fax mode Setting Density in text and photo mode 1 Select the item to be adjusted The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Adjust the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting MIXED DARKER Change in density when manual 0to3 0 density is set dark MIXED LIGHTER Change in density when manual 0to3 0 density is set light Increasing the
319. r length switch con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective upper paper length switch Check if YC13 B2 on the main PCB goes low when the upper paper length switch is turned on If not replace the upper paper length switch Poor contact in the upper paper width switch con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective upper paper width switch Check if the levels of YC12 3 YC12 4 and YC12 5 on the main PCB change alternately when the width guide in the upper drawer is moved If not replace the upper paper width switch 41 The size of paper in the lower drawer is not displayed cor rectly Poor contact in the lower paper length switch con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective lower paper length switch Check if YC13 A19 on the main PCB goes low when the lower paper length switch is turned on If not replace the lower paper length switch Poor contact in the lower paper width switch con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective lower paper width switch Check if the
320. r service manual 85 Stapler jam See the booklet stitcher service manual 86 Staple jam See the booklet stitcher service manual 87 Power on jam See the booklet stitcher service manual 88 Door open jam See the booklet stitcher service manual 1 5 8 89 Punch jam See the booklet stitcher service manual 3 Paper misfeeds Problem Causes check procedures 2FD 2FF 2FG Corrective measures 1 A paper jam in the paper feed convey ing or eject section is indicated as soon as the power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch eject switch or feedshift switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace feed switch 1 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the correspond ing switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective registration switch Run
321. r with the mounting plate Ejection EE I 22 22 iU uM Figure 1 3 88 6 Remove the two screws and then remove the inner ejection cover Inner ejection cover Figure 1 3 89 7 Remove the screw located at the front of the static charge eliminator of the copier fit the E ss flat spring ejection from the lower side and uc ee secure it with the removed screw Figure 1 3 90 1 8 40 2FD 2FF 2FG 8 Remove the blue screw from the transfer unit and then remove the mounting plate 9 Remove the securing tape from the 13 pin connector pass the wire under the stapler motor and connect the wire with the 13 pin Mounting plate connector Transfer unit Blue screw Figure 1 3 91 10 Insert the transfer unit into the copier from the front side and slide it to the left Secure the unit using two TP A bronze screws M3 x 05 and the pin that has been fitted to the transfer unit TP A bronze screw M3 x 05 Transfer unit T i Bryn 1 A Li TP A bronze screw M3 x 05 Pin Figure 1 3 92 11 Insert the metal hook of the transfer unit into Metal fittings Hook the oblong hole of the frame of the copier and TP A bronze secure it using a TP A bronze screw M3
322. ray into the recessed portion of the copier Put the hook on the right side onto the pin 10 Open the left transfer cover and the front cover Fit the left front cover JS to the location to which the upper front cover that has been removed in step 3 was fitted Fitting section Rail left front cover JS Job separator tray Figure 1 3 108 11 Insert the power plug of the copier into an outlet and turn the power switch on 12 Set the copy ejection location of the machine default settings to job separator 13 Make a test copy to check that a copy is ejected to the job separator tray 1 3 47 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 3 13 Installing the Facsimile System option Procedure 1 Remove 13 screws and take off the rear Rear cover Cover Figure 1 3 109 Printer system If the printing system is installed 990906 9900006 90000 Wa 9oooooo 90000006 9999000900096 Raas e d EE ae E ooo 889999o090ooocoocoa did 9999900 n qu vooo 9990000000606 o 9999oooooooco 889900000000 820000000000 2000 eaves S8990000000 system in place and pull the printing system 2 Remove the 2 screws holding the printer out of the shield cover Figure 1 3 110 Shield cover DAS NWO Wr 7 Seil E SES an 3 Remove 13 screws and take off the shield cover Figure 1 3 111
323. rect operation 1 5 34 Finisher front stapler problem The front stapler home position sen sor does not change state from non detection to detection within 200 ms of the start of front stapler motor counterclockwise forward rotation During initialization the front stapler home position sensor does not change state from non detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of front stapler motor clockwise re verse rotation The front stapler connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The front stapler malfunctions a The front sta pler is blocked with a staple b The front sta pler is broken a Remove the front stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the stapling sec tion of the stapler b Replace the front stapler and check for correct operation Defective finisher main PCB Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation Optional Contents 2FD 2FF 2FG Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Finisher rear stapler problem 3000 sheet finisher The rear stapler home position sensor does not change state from non de tection to detection within 200 ms of the start of rear stapler motor counterclockwise forward rotation During initialization the rear stapler home position sensor does not change state fro
324. reduce the time for the first copy select OFF Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Performing the aging before copying OFF Not performing the aging before copying Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed HDD Scandisk Description Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk Purpose If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is per rmed the control information in the hard disk drive may be damaged Use this mode to restore the data Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key When scanning of the disk is complete the execution result is displayed 4 Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without executing scandisk press the stop clear ley The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 73 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 74 Description Checking clearin
325. reen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 19 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U032 Checking clutch operation Description Turns each clutch on Purpose To check the operation of each clutch Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the clutch to be operated The selected item is displayed in reverse and the clutch turns on for 1 s Display Clutches PF1 Upper paper feed clutch PFCL U PF2 Lower paper feed clutch PFCL U PFBYP Bypass paper feed clutch BYPPFCL FEED1 Feed clutch 1 FCL1 FEED2 Feed clutch 2 FCL2 FEED3 Feed clutch 3 FCL3 BYPF Bypass feed clutch BYPFCL RES Registration clutch RCL DUPF Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking solenoid operation Description Turns each solenoid on Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the solenoid to be operated The selected item is displayed in reverse and the solenoid turns on for 1s Display Solenoids TONER SOL Toner feed solenoid TNFSOL BRANCH1 SOL Feedshift solenoid FSSOL BRANCH2 SOL Feedshift solenoid FSSOL MAIN SW SOL Power switch turns on Optional Select MAIN SW SOL to check the operation of the power sw
326. rinter board FPDIR signal Printer board FPPOWER signal Ground Printer board 5 V DC supply Printer board 5 V DC supply Printer board 5 V DC supply Printer board 5 V DC supply Printer board 5 V DC supply Printer board 5 V DC supply Connected to the fax control PCB Optional O OO JO Oo Q N i o FPVCLK GND FVCLK GND FMRE GND FPVD GND FPHSYNC O OOOOOO Ot Si SF a Oe 3 3 V DC 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse Fax control PCB 3 3 V DC supply Ground Fax control PCB FPVCLK signal Ground Fax control PCB FVCLK signal Ground Fax control PCB FMRE signal Ground Fax control PCB FPVD signal Ground Fax control PCB FPHSYNC signal 2 3 15 2FD 2FF 2FG Connector Pin No Signal Voltage Description YC44 Connected to the fax control PCB GND FPVSYNC GND FOVSYNC GND FOHSTHIN GND FMIPOUTO GND FMREOUT MMISTS GND FMMI_TXD2 GND FMMI_RXD2 GND FAXRESET FAXREADY PREQ SREQ SETFAX MAINSTS GND FMAIN TXDO GND FMAIN RXDO S O OO O O O O 0 0 O 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse Analog Analog 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse 5 0 V DC pulse Analog Analo
327. ription U030 Checking motor operation Description Drives each motor Purpose To check the operation of each motor Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the motor to be operated The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts Display Operation FEED Paper feed motor operates MAIN Drive motor operates EJECT FW Eject motor rotates forward EJECT REV Eject motor rotates in reverse 3 To stop operation press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop key after operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking switches for paper conveying Description Displays the on off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key A list of the switches the on off status of which can be checked are displayed 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When the on status of a switch is detected that switch is displayed in reverse Display Switches F1 Feed switch 1 FSW1 F2 Feed switch 2 FSW2 F3 Feed switch 3 FSW3 BYP Bypass feed switch BYPFSW RES Registration switch RSW EJE Eject switch ESW BRA Feedshift switch FSSW DUP Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW JOB Job separator eject switch JBESW Optional Completion Press the stop clear key The sc
328. rns to the same status as when the power is turned on Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current count press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Supplement The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below To change the initial settings in those items be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination Initial setting according to the destinations Maintenance Title Japan Inch Europe Metric item No Asia Pacific 253 Switching between double and single counts Single Double Double 255 Setting auto clear time 120s 90s 90s 1 4 53 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U253 Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters Purpose According to user copy service provider request select if A3 11 x 17 paper is to be counted as one sheet single count or two sheets double count Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select double or single count The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description SINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paper DOUBLE COUNT A3 LEDGER Double count for A3 11 x 17 paper only DOUBLE COUNT B4 Double count for B4 size or larger Initial s
329. roblem is de tected with the batch processing motor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher stapler shift motor problem A problem is de tected with the stapler shift mo tor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher paddle motor prob lem A problem is de tected with the paddle motor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher folding problem A problem is de tected with the folding sensor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher backup RAM data problem A backup RAM data error is de tected See the booklet stitcher service manual Optional Booklet stitcher punch motor prob lem A problem is de tected with the punch motor See the booklet stitcher service manual 1 5 35 2FD 2FF 2FG Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Booklet stitcher shift motor prob lem A problem is de tected with the shift motor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher punch communica tion problem A problem is de tected with the punch communi cation See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher punch sensor prob lem A problem is de tected with the punch sensor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher side punch sensor problem A problem is de tected with the side punch sen
330. rocessed on the main PCB MPCB and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit LSU By repeatedly turning the laser on and off the laser scanner unit forms a latent image on the drum surface Figure 2 1 9 Laser scanner unit 1 DLaser diode PCB LDPCB 2 Collimator lens 3 Cylindrical lens 4 Polygon motor PM 5 Polygon mirror M lens Mirror Mirror 9 BD sensor mirror 49 Cylindrical correcting lens BD sensor 2 1 9 2FD 2FF 2FG Figure 2 1 10 Laser scanner unit 2 D Laser diode Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum 2 Collimator lens Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam 3 Cylindrical lens Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution 4 Polygon mirror Six facet mirror that rotates at approximately 28031 rpm with each face reflecting the laser beam toward the drum for one main direction scan f lens Corrects for non linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface keeps the beam diameter constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam is on the drum surface Mirror Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction Mirror Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction BD sensor mirror Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the main direc
331. rom 3 5 s A4 11 x 81 2 40 cpm copier 50 cpm copier 25 s or less room temperature 23 C 73 4 F 50 RH In preheat energy saver mode 12 s or less room temperature 23 C 73 4 F 50 RH priorty to power save Automatic feed Capacity Drawers 500 sheets Manual feed Capacity Bypass 200 sheets 1 999 sheets a Si drum diameter 40 mm Single positive corona charging 500 pA Semiconductor laser Polygon mirror Dry reverse developing single component system Developer 1 component magnetism toner Developing bias 1 72 kV AC Developing shift bias 160 V Toner replenishing automatic from a toner container 1 1 1 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Transfer system Separation system Fixing system Charge erasing system Cleaning system Scanning system Bit map memon onsnsnnaennansnniananeeene Image storage memory Resolution Light source Dimensions Weight Floor requirements Functions eie Power source Power consumption Options Transfer roller 100 pA Separation electrode 60 or 10 pA depending on the paper Heat roller H
332. ront cover bypass tray drawers and original detection switch 2 Remove the tape and then remove the pad at the eject section 3 Remove the tape holding the power cord ss Tapes Figure 1 3 3 4 Remove the three tapes holding the pins for light source units 1 and 2 5 Remove the tape holding the conveying cover Figure 1 3 4 1 3 5 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 6 Pull upper and lower drawers out and remove the tape holding each of the drawer lift If necessary please fix the cassette cursor with the screws included in the machine box t Install the optional paper feeder or large paper deck 1 Install the optional paper feeder or large paper deck as necessary see page 1 3 13 to 1 3 21 I Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2 1 Remove the two pins for light source unit 1 and the pin for light source unit 2 t Install the original cover or the DP t Install other optional devices 1 3 6 Figure 1 3 5 Light source unit 1 pins Light source unit 2 pin Figure 1 3 6 1 Install the original cover or DP see page 1 3 33 when installing the DP 1 Install the optional devices job separator finisher fax board and or printer board etc as necessary F Install the toner container 1 Open the front cover 2 Tap the top of the toner container five to six times 3 Shake the toner container approxi
333. rrectly in serted Check whether the internal tray unit or front cover catches are damaged Finisher tray elevation motor problem 3000 sheet finisher The sort tray is not detected in the home position within 30 s of the start of the tray elevation motor rotation Poor contact in the tray elevation motor connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The tray elevation motor malfunc tions Replace the tray elevation motor and check for correct operation Defective finisher main PCB Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation Finisher front side registration motor problem 3000 sheet finisher or built in finisher If the front side registration home po sition sensor is on in initialization the sensor does not turn off within 570 ms of starting initialization If the front side registration home po sition sensor is off in initialization the sensor does not turn on within 3180 ms of starting initialization The front side reg istration motor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The front side reg istration motor malfunctions Replace the front side registration motor and check for correct operation The front side reg istration home po sit
334. rrupt key The copy mode screen is displayed 5 Press the start key A MIP PG pattern is output Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 30 Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U091 Checking shading Description Performs scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading is performed displaying the original scanning values at nine points of the contact glass Purpose To check the change in original scanning values before and after shading The results may be used to decide the causes for fixing unevenness uneven density of the gray area of an image either due to optical shading or CCD or other problems Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item to be operated The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description SHD BEFORE Performs scanning before shading and displays the result SHD AFTER Performs scanning after shading and displays the result 3 Press the start key Scanning is performed under the selected conditions and the result is displayed When scanning is performed before shading the scan value at the machine center should be slightly different from those at the machine front and rear When scanning is performed after shadi
335. s Setting the finisher Amount of slack in the paper Booklet stapling position adjustment Side registration cursor stop position Checking the operation of large paper deck and paper feeder Checking the paper ejection to optional devices Setting the maintenance cycle Checking clearing the maintenance count Setting the destination Switching between double and single counts Turning auto start function on off Setting auto clear time Switching copy operation at toner empty detection Changing the copy count timing Setting the display order of the date Setting OEM purchaser code Setting the number of days after which to automatically delete documents Setting the laser scanner unit type Type of the laser scanner unit Laser scanner unit output power Setting auto application change time Setting the individual border erase mode indication Setting the black line cleaning indication Side ejection setting Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation Setting the paper ejection Setting the size conversion factor Specific paper feed location setting for printing function nitial setting for executing maintenance item U020 1 4 12 Initial setting Inch specifications Letter Metric specifications A4 400000 30 cpm 500000 40 50 cpm Japan Double count ON 90 Single mode 70 After ejection Inch specifications MONTH DATE YEAR Metric specifications DATE MONTH
336. s conveying section Jam code 23 Broken bypass feed switch actuator Check visually and replace the bypass feed switch if its actuator is broken Defective bypass feed switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the bypass feed switch on and off manually Replace the bypass feed switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective registration switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on and off manually Replace the registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 17 A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying Jam code 05 Defective registration switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the operation panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 5 49 18 A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying jam in registration trans fer section Jam code 30 Broken feed switch 1 ac tuator Check visually and replace fe
337. s displayed Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy Purpose To be set according to frequency of use set to the more frequently used mode Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select ON or OFF The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description ON Duplex copy OFF Simplex copy Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 61 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U344 Setting preheat energy saver mode Description Changes the control for preheat energy saver mode Purpose According to user request selects which has priority the recovery time from preheat or energy saver Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select control mode The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Control in preheat mode ENERGY STAR The fixing control temperature is lowered by 20 C 68 F and forced stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat GEEA The fixing control temperature is lowered by 15 C 59 F and forced stabiliza
338. s the coil If none replace cooling fan motor 6 Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 6 connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none repair or replace the cable 14 Cooling fan motor 7 does not operate Broken cooling fan motor 7 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace cooling fan motor 7 Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 7 connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none repair or replace the cable 15 The upper paper feed clutch does not operate Broken upper paper feed clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the upper paper feed clutch Poor contact in the upper paper feed clutch connec tor terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC16 B1 on the main PCB goes low If not replace the main PCB 16 The lower paper feed clutch does not operate Broken lower paper feed clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the lower paper feed clutch Poor contact in the lower paper feed clutch connec tor terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace
339. sher by removing one screw each 2 Remove the four caps from above the four casters of the finisher Finisher M4 x 12 Q TP screw S d M4 x 16 Front cover Q TP screw Figure 1 3 61 j Support rubbers Figure 1 3 62 Caster Figure 1 3 63 1 3 29 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Loosen the two screws on each of the four casters 4 Adjust the height of the rear right caster by turning its adjustment bolt using a cross headed screwdriver so that the axis of the pin of the latch catch is aligned with the middle of the three markings on the right of the slot of the finisher or switchback unit when the finisher is joined to the copier viewed from the machine front Note Turning the adjustment bolts clockwise lowers the finisher while turning them counterclockwise lifts the finisher Screws Figure 1 3 64 5 Adjust the height of the front right caster in the same manner as in step 4 so that the axis of the pin of the latch catch is aligned with the marking above the slot and the center of the two hooks on the finisher align with the center of the holes on the latch catch when the finisher is joined to the copier viewed from above Pin Figure 1 3 65 1 3 30 2FD 2FF 2FG When the switchback unit is installed 6 Adjust the height of the
340. sher main PCB and check for correct operation Optional Contents 2FD 2FF 2FG Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Mailbox communication problem Communication errors from the com munication microcomputer on the main PCB No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a commu nication error parity or checksum er ror is detected five times in succes sion Poor contact in the connector ter minals Check the connection of connectors YC3 on the main PCB and CN1 on the mailbox main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation Defective mailbox main PCB Replace the mailbox main PCB and check for correct operation Switchback unit communication problem Communication errors from the com munication microcomputer on the main PCB No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a commu nication error parity or checksum er ror is detected five times in succes sion Poor contact in the connector ter minals Check the connection of connectors YC3 on the main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for cor rect operation Defective switch back unit main PCB
341. sition Mirror 2 frame Figure 1 6 34 4 Loop the inner ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the right of the scanner unit winding from below to Ee EE 5 Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from above to el M 6 Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit eee cee eee Figure 1 6 35 1 6 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 2FD 2FF 2FG Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire pulleys at the left of the scanner unit winding from below to above Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from below to usss ss ee E DOV EE Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the left of the scanner unit Hook the round terminals onto the scanner tension SpringS a Remove the scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools Gather the scanner wires toward the locating balls Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position Put the mirror 1 frame on the scanner rail and move it toward the left side of the machine Insert the frame securing tools into the positioning holes leftmost holes at the front and
342. size is output If not specify the paper feed location When output is complete the screen for selecting an item is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode Purpose To exit the maintenance mode Method Press the start key The normal copy mode is entered 1 4 14 Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport position in which the frame can be fixed Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel It is displayed in reverse 3 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport Completion The power switch turns off Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U003 Setting the service telephone number Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine Method Press the start key The currently set telephone number is displayed Setting 1 Enter a telephone number up to 15 digits using the numeric keys To enter sy
343. so the toner quantity in the waste toner tank is sensed with the overflow sensor OFS Cleaning roller Cleaning spiral Cleaning lamp CL Cleaning blade Figure 2 1 22 Cleaning and charge erasing sections CL REM OFS OFS Figure 2 1 23 Cleaning and charge erasing sections block diagram 2 1 19 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 1 7 Fixing section The fixing section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2 1 24 When paper reaches the fixing section after the transfer process it passes between the press roller and heat roller which is heated by fixing heaters M or S FH M or FH S Pressure is applied by the fixing unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted fused and fixed onto the paper The heat roller is heated by fixing heaters M or S FH M or FH S inside it its surface temperature is detected by the fixing unit thermistor 1 and 2 FTH1 2 and is regulated by the fixing heaters turning on and off If the fixing section becomes abnormally hot fixing unit thermostat FTS operates shutting the power to the fixing heaters off When the fixing process is completed the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and is conveyed from the copier to eject and switchback section D Upper fixing unit cover 2 Fixing housing 3 Heat roller LO Heat roller separation claw 5 Fixing heater M FH M 6 Fixing heater S
344. sor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher punch backup RAM data problem A problem is de tected with the punch backup RAM data See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher punch dust sensor problem A problem is de tected with the punch dust sen sor See the booklet stitcher service manual Booklet stitcher broken punch power source wire problem A broken punch power source wire problem is de tected See the booklet stitcher service manual 1 5 36 Mailbox drive motor problem While the mailbox drive motor is driv ing synchronization signals do not synchronize continually for 464 ms motor lockup Defective mailbox drive motor or mailbox main PCB Run a simulation of the mailbox communi cation test mode see page 3 2 2 of the mailbox service manual If there is any problem with the communication replace the mailbox drive motor or the mailbox main PCB and check for correct operation Optional 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 5 3 Image formation problems 1 No image appears 2 No image appears 3 Image is too light 4 Background is visible entirely white entirely black See page 1 5 38 See page 1 5 39 See page 1 5 40 See page 1 5 40 5 A white line appears 6 A black line appears 7 A black line appears 8 One side of the copy longitudinally longitudinally laterally image is
345. splay Paper eject device MAIL Mailbox JOB SEPARATOR Job separator LEFT BINOUTPUT Ejection slot at the machine left finisher not installed 3 When selecting the mailbox specify the mail tray number 1 to 7 to which paper is to be ejected by using the cursor up down keys If 0 is selected paper is ejected to the mail trays in ascending order from mail tray 1 to mail tray 7 repeatedly Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 52 Setting the maintenance cycle Description Displays and changes the maintenance cycle Purpose To check and change the maintenance cycle Method Press the start key The current setting is displayed as follows Setting 1 Change the setting using the numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999 400000 30 cpm 500000 40 50 cpm 2 Press the start key The value is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U251 Checking clearing the maintenance count Description Displa
346. splayed Maintenance item No 2FD 2FF 2FG Description U070 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed Purpose To be executed if the correct magnification is not obtained in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP is used Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U053 gt U065 gt U070 Method Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Original conveying motor speed 25 to 25 2 0 1 Increasing the setting makes the image longer and decreasing it makes the image shorter 2 Press the start key The value is set Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 25 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Maintenance item No 1 4 26 Description Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing Purpose To be executed if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the orginal and the copy image when the optional D
347. ss the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 27 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No U073 Checking scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions Purpose To check scanner operation Method 1 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item to be changed The selected item is displayed in reverse 3 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Display Operating conditions Setting range ZOOM SIZE Magnification Original size 100 to 400 See below LAMP Original sizes for each setting in SIZE Setting Paper size Setting Paper size 8 A4 42 A5R 9 B5 47 Folio 24 11 x 81 2 52 11 x 17 36 A3 53 11 x15 39 B4 55 81 2 x 14 40 A4R 56 81 2 x 11 41 B5R 58 51 2 x 81 2 4 Press the start key Scanning starts under the selected conditions 5 To stop operation press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key when scanning stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP Purpose Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and when scanning an original from the DP Method Press the start key Setting 1 C
348. sting covers to be closed is displayed when the front cover and conveying Cover are closed a 1 5 53 CON lcs esti i icine cle eed EES 1 5 53 Mechanical problems Ln 1 5 54 1 No primary paper feed u uy wu eter ee a inte 1 5 54 2 No s coridary paper ET DEE 1 5 54 3 Eel Ci zeBerlerid me 1 5 54 4 Th Eeler TE 1 5 54 5 Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time u u uu u 1 5 54 6 Paper Mr c 1 5 54 7 Toner drops on the paper CONVEYING path sssssseeeeenen eene 1 5 55 8 e eu Maele EE 1 5 55 1 6 Assembly and Disassembly 1 6 1 1 6 2 1 6 3 Precautions for assembly and disassembly uuu 1 6 1 1 PrOCAUTIONS denges aasad Ea Ua NEE dE Ee deed 1 6 1 2 Runriing a maintenance Meri U Q Q UU U L u I asa aus Lai CE E sassa eGaqisnsstassasaqasqa 1 6 2 Paper feed section eCdE 1 6 3 1 Detaching and refitting the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys 1 6 3 2 Detaching and refitting the bypass separation bypass papaer feed and bypass forwarding he UC 1 6 5 3 Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement 1 6 10 3 1 Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing a 1 6 10 3 2 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
349. storing the drum When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surface to strong direct light Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F and at a relative humidity not higher than 85 RH Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum Do not touch the drum surface with any object Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil clean it 1 2 2 Toner Store the toner in a cool dark place Avoid direct light and high humidity 1 2 3 Installation environment 1 Temperature 10 35 C 50 95 F Humidity 15 85 RH Power supply 120 V AC 12A 220 240 V AC 5 7 A Average Power source frequency 50 Hz 0 3 60 Hz 0 3 Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity abrupt ambient temperature changes and hot or cold air directed onto the machine Avoid dust and vibration Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface maximum allowance inclination 1 Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such as mercury acidic of alkaline vapors inorganic gasses NOx SOx gases and chlorine based organic
350. switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective registration switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Defective eject switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 44 The message re questing covers to be closed is dis played when the front cover and con veying cover are closed Poor contact in the con nector
351. t Procedure 1 Open the front cover and conveying cover 2 Remove the three screws holding the front left cover and then the cover Front left cover Figure 1 6 65 3 Remove the screw holding the fixing unit and then the unit 4 Check or replace the transfer roller assembly and refit all the removed parts Fixing unit Figure 1 6 66 2 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws Procedure Claw 1 Remove the fixing unit mes a 2 Remove the two screws and detach the Claw Upper fixing cover upper fixing cover while holding the four claws A Z Z Claw Figure 1 6 67 1 6 36 3 Remove the heat roller separation claws from the upper fixing cover 4 Replace the heat roller separation claws and refit all the removed parts 3 Detaching and refitting the press roller Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller Procedure 1 Remove the fixing unit see page 1 6 36 2 Remove the upper fixing cover see page 1 6 36 3 Remove the front and rear press springs 4 Detach the press roller from the fixing unit 5 Replace the press roller and refit all the removed parts 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Figure 1 6 68 Press spring Press spring Figure 1 6 69 Press roller Figure 1 6 70 1 6 37 2FD 2FF 2FG 4 Detaching and refitting the fixing heater M and S Follow
352. t operation Fax control PCB CG ROM checksum error A checksum error occurred with the CG ROM data of the fax control PCB Defective fax software Install the fax software to Ver 2 xx or later Defective fax control PCB Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation Fax control PCB flash program area checksum error A checksum error occurred with the program of the fax control PCB Defective fax software Install the fax software to Ver 2 xx or later Defective fax control PCB Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation Fax control PCB software switch checksum error A checksum error occurred with the software switch value of the fax control PCB Defective fax software Install the fax software to Ver 2 xx or later Defective fax control PCB Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation Graphics data transfer problem High capacity data transfer between the fax control PCB and the main PCB was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the specified times Poor contact in the connector terminals Check the connection of connector YC44 on the fax control PCB and the main PCB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PCB or fax control PCB Replace the main PCB or fax control PCB and check for correct operation Program
353. ta in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values This code is not displayed The service call counter counts the frequency of occurrence only as for this code Problem with the backup memory data Turn safety switch 1 off and back on and run maintenance item U020 to set the con tents of the backup memory data again Defective backup RAM If the C0110 is displayed after re setting the backup memory contents replace the backup RAM Backup memory read write error 2 Reading from or writing to the backup memory cannot be performed Defective EEPROM Replace EEPROM 1 and 2 Backup memory data problem A checksum error in backup data is detected This code is not displayed The service call counter counts the frequency of occurrence only as for this code Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Accounting count error A checksum error in backup data of the accounting counter is detected Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division MMI communication problem There is no reply after 20 retries at communication Defective main PCB Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation Printer board communication prob lem There is no reply after 20 retries at communication Poor contact in the connector ter minals Check the connection of connector YC43 on the main
354. talling the switchback unit 1 Remove the two support rubbers on the right of the finisher and loosely fit the two M3 x 8 binding screws in their places 2 Remove the two screws binding screws Figure 1 3 57 1 3 27 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Release the hook of the switchback unit by lifting the release lever 4 Fit the switchback unit to the finisher by hanging the hook of the switchback unit on the loosely fitted M3 x 8 binding screws Tighten the loosely fitted M3 x 8 binding screws 6 Secure the switchback unit using two M4 x 12 TP screws Close the switchback unit o N 8 Remove the two screws from the cover of the finisher 1 3 28 Switchback unit Finisher e NSS o T TP screw M3x8 binding screws M4 x 12 TP screw Figure 1 3 59 Figure 1 3 60 9 Insert the rib of the front cover into the groove in the top cover of the switchback unit and then fit the front cover to the finisher 10 Secure the front cover by fitting an M4 x 12 TP screw and M4 x 16 TP screw into the holes where screws were inserted see step 8 Rib 2FD 2FF 2FG 11 Fit the two support rubbers removed in step 1 to the switchback unit 12 If the finisher and the copier do not engage securely perform the following finisher height adjustment Adjusting the height of the finisher 1 Remove the two covers from the lower left part of the fini
355. tart key and make Is the image correct End 1 6 26 SU Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 6 52 Retighten the two screws and refit the contact glass Remove the contact glass Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame For copy example 1 move the frame in the direction of the white arrow gt For copy example 2 move the frame in the direction of the black arrow 4 Mirror 2 frame gt Screws Figure 1 6 53 8 Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct 2FD 2FF 2FG U053 U065 U005 U067 main scannin auxiliary scanning P 1 4 22 l direction i direction P 1 6 28 P 1 6 30 Caution Before making the following adjustment ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode Also perform 9 Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction page 1 6 28 and 11 Adjusting the scanner center line page 1 6 30 after this adjustment Procedure Enter maintenance mode I Enter 065 using the numeric keys Press the start key Select MAIN SCAN ADJ main scanning direction Press the interrupt key Place an
356. te Og O mb Inverter wire Figure 1 6 30 Front wire retainer 1 6 16 Mirror 1 frame Rear wire retainer Figure 1 6 31 5 Unhook the round terminal of the scanner wire from the scanner tension spring on the left side of the scanner unit 6 Remove the scanner wire 2 2 Refitting the scanner wires Caution 2FD 2FF 2FG Scanner tension spring Scanner wire When fitting the wires be sure to use those specified below Machine front P N 2AV1219 black Machine rear P N 2AV1220 gray Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools P N 2AV6808 Two scanner wire stoppers P N 3596811 Procedure 1 Insert the locating ball on each of the scanner wires into the hole in the respective scanner wire drum and wind the scanner wire three turns inward and four turns outward With the locating ball as the reference point wind the shorter end of each of the wires inward 2 Secure the scanner wires using the scanner wire stoppers X4 Four turns outward Scanner wire Figure 1 6 32 Scanner wire stoppers Three turns inward Three turns inward Locating ball Y Scanner wire drum Figure 1 6 33 Four turns outward 1 6 17 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Insert the two frame securing tools into the Frame securing tools positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame in po
357. tenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Defective original switch back switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 29 An original jams in the DP is indicated during copying a jam in the original conveying section Jam code 73 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse 30 An original jams in the DP is indicated during copying a jam in the original switchback section 1 Jam code 75 Defective original switch back switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in re verse Check if the original con veying motor malfunctions Run maint
358. terminals of safety switch 1 or 2 Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective safety switch 1 or 2 Check for continuity across each switch If there is no continuity when the switch is on replace it 45 Others Wiring is broken shorted or makes poor contact Check for continuity If none repair Noise Locate the source of noise and remove 1 5 53 2FD 2FF 2FG 1 5 5 Mechanical problems Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 1 No primary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the following rollers or pulleys are dirty with paper powder up per lower forwarding pulleys upper lower paper feed pulleys upper lower separation pulleys feed rollers registration rollers by pass forwarding pulleys bypass paper feed pulleys and bypass separation pulleys Clean with isopropyl alcohol Check if the upper lower forwarding pulleys upper lower paper feed pulleys or upper lower separation pulleys is deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys see page 1 6 3 Electrical problem with the following electro magnetic clutches upper lower paper feed clutches feed clutches 1 2 3 bypass paper feed clutch and bypass feed clutch See pages 1 5 48 and 49 2 No secondary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the right and left registration rollers are
359. the FSW2 FSW3 FCL2 FCL3 SCSW LM U LM L PLSW U PLSW L LICSW U LICSW L PPSW U and PPSW L O O i QO i i O 0 0 00 0 000 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC DV DC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC Ground FSW3 ON OFF 5 V DC supply for FSW3 24 V DC supply for FCL3 FCL3 ON OFF Ground FSW2 ON OFF 5 V DC supply for FSW2 Ground SCSW ON OFF 24 V DC supply for FCL2 FCL2 ON OFF LM U paper level detection switch ON OFF Ground LM U paper level detection switch ON OFF Ground LM U ON OFF Ground PLSW L ON OFF Ground PLSW U ON OFF LM L paper level detection switch ON OFF Ground LM L paper level detection switch ON OFF Ground LM L ON OFF Ground LICSW U ON OFF 5 V DC supply for LICSW U Ground PPSW U ON OFF 5 V DC supply for PPSW U Ground LICSW L ON OFF 5 V DC supply for LICSW L Ground PPSW L ON OFF 5 V DC supply for PPSW L 2 3 11 2FD 2FF 2FG Connector Pin No Signal Voltage Description YC14 Connected to the cooling fan motor 2 1 GND CFM2 REM Ground CFM2 ON OFF Connected to the FSSOL FSSW CFM1 CCSW PFCL U PFCL L RCL HUMSENS and EM FSSOL2 FSSOL1 24V GND FSSW 5V GND 5V GND ESW 5V CFM1 24V
360. the copier enters primary stabilization and fixing heater M EH M turns off temporarily and turns on again after 13 s 100 ms after the primary stabilization the drive motor DM turns on Also the cooling fan motor for second speed switches to full speed rotation 25 900 ms after the drive motor DM turns on the developing bias DB REM turns on and at the same time transfer charging TC REM starts 9 When the fixing temperature reaches 165 C 329 F the copier enters secondary stabilization Fixing heaters M and S FH M and FH S are turned on and off to keep the fixing temperature at 165 C 329 F and aging starts Q 10 s after copying is enabled transfer charging TC REM ends QG 30 s after the secondary stabilization the drive motor DM turns off and the aging ends Q 15 s after the drive motor DM turns off the cooling fan motor for second speed switches to half speed rotation 2 1 21 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 1 8 Eject and switchback sections The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fixing has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forward rotation of the eject motor In duplex copying paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the eject motor When paper is transferred to the job separator or the internal finisher the feedshift solenoid FSSOL is turned on to activate the feedshift guide to switch the paper transfer path D Feedshift g
361. the exposure lamp EL and scanned by the CCD PCB CCDPCB in the image scanning unit via the three mirrors the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner When the DF is used the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DF original scanning position to start scanning Optional Original Figure 2 1 8 Optional section block diagram Start key 338 P sub F4 Fwd rotation SM j 472 P 10394 P a Rev rotation 9922 P 200 P SHPSW FVSYNC signal Timing chart 2 1 4 Scanner operation When the start key is pressed the scanner motor SM reverses for 338 pulses and then rotates forward b 472 pulses after the scanner motor SM starts rotating forward the FVSYNC signal turns on for 9922 pulses for scanning The scanner motor SM reverses for 10394 pulses and then rotates forward d 200 pulses after the scanner home position switch SHPSW turns on the scanner motor SM reverses e 200 pulses after the scanner home position switch SHPSW turns off the scanner motor SM turns off and the scanner stops at its home position 2 1 8 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 Image printing The image data scanned by the CCD PCB CCDPCB is p
362. the rear of the scanner unit and screw the mirror 1 frame while securing both the mirror 1 frame and the mirror 2 frame Remove the two frame securing tools Refit all the removed parts Figure 1 6 36 Frame securing tools Figure 1 6 37 1 6 19 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be checked or replaced Procedure 1 Remove the developing unit and drum unit o see pages 1 6 32 and 34 a 2 Remove the four screws holding the ower right cover and then the cover Remove the three screws holding the eject cover and then the cover ATE e Eject cover Lower right cover Figure 1 6 38 3 Remove the four screws holding the front right cover and then the cover Ao Front right cover Z Figure 1 6 39 4 Remove the five screws holding the inner Inner cover cover and then the cover Figure 1 6 40 1 6 20 5 Remove the two screws and detach the connector and then remove the fan duct 6 Remove the six screws holding the toner container retainer and then the retainer 7 Remove the four screws and detach the connector and then remove the laser scanner unit 8 Replace the laser scanner unit and refit all the removed parts 2FD 2FF 2FG Fan duct Connector Figure 1 6 41 Toner container retainer Figure 1 6 42 Connector Laser scanner unit Figure 1 6 43 1 6 21 2FD 2F
363. the start key Y Press the interrupt key Press the start key Y The new setting is stored Press the start key and make a test copy For copy example 1 decrease the Is the leading edge value using the cursor down key registration correct For copy example 2 increase the value using the cursor up key Setting range 2 2 Press the stop clear key to Initilal setting 2 exit maintenance mode Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0 1 mm End 1 6 11 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 3 Adjusting the center line of image printing Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original when paper is fed from the drawer U067 U072 See P 1 6 30 P 1 4 27 Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the above adjustments in maintenance mode Procedure Center line of printing Enter maintenance mode Enter 034 using the numeric keys Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Press the start key Figure 1 6 23 LSU OUT Optical axis adjustment data LSU OUT DUP Optical axis adjustment Select the item to be adjusted data for duplex copying second face Press the interrupt key Press the start key The new setting is stored Press the start key to output a test pattern
364. ting the type of cooling fan Description Sets the new or old type of cooling fan Purpose To change the setting according to the type of the cooling n Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select NEW or OLD The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description NEW New type of cooling fan OLD Old type of cooling fan Initial setting NEW 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the type of paper corveying unit Description Sets the new or old type of paper corveying unit Purpose To change the setting according to the type of the paper corveying unit Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select NEW or OLD The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description NEW New type of paper conveying unit OLD Old type of paper conveying unit Initial setting NEW 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen br selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Outputting the machine used circumstances
365. tion horizontal sync signal 9 Cylindrical correcting lens Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror to the BD sensor BD sensor Detects the beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror outputting a signal to the main PCB MPCB to provide timing for the main direction sync signal 2 1 10 2FD 2FF 2FG The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2 1 11 Less than 100 um Less than 85 um Figure 2 1 11 Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror while scanning in the auxiliary direction is provided by the rotating drum forming a static latent image on the drum The static latent image of the letter A for example is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2 1 12 Electrical charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other Main scanning direction 5 Auxilary scanning direction
366. tion is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat Initial setting ENERGY STAR 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification Setting the sleep mode operation Description If the machine is equipped with the facsimile feature this mode sets whether or not the machine performs finisher initialization when the machine receives a facsimile with the main switch off Purpose To disable finisher initialization change the setting value to MODE1 If MODE1 is selected however even if the main switch is turned off control in the sleep mode will be performed and the power supply PCB will not be turned off resulting in increase of power consumption Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1
367. tion panel is not displayed in re verse Broken duplex paper con veying switch actuator Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch if its actuator is broken Defective duplex paper conveying switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex paper convey ing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not dis played in reverse 25 A paper jam in the duplex section is indicated during copying jam in du plex paper convey ing section 2 Jam code 61 Broken duplex paper con veying switch actuator Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch if its actuator is broken Defective duplex convey ing switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex paper convey ing switch on and off manually Replace the duplex paper con veying switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the op eration panel is not displayed in reverse Broken feed switch 1 ac tuator Check visually and replace feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the operation panel is not displayed in reverse 26 An original jams in the DP is indicated during copying no original feed Jam code 70 Optional Defective original feed Sw
368. toconductor Charging system Exposure light sour Exposure scanning Developing system Ce system 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 Indirect electrostatic system Sheets and books Maximum size A3 11 x 17 Fixed Drawer Plain paper 64 105 g nf Bypass table Plain paper 45 200 g n Special paper Transparencies tracing paper colored paper letterhead and envelopes when using the printer function only Note Use the bypass table for special paper Maximum A3 11 x 17 Minimum A6R 51 2 x 81 2 When the bypass table is used Manual mode 25 400 1 increments Auto copy mode fixed ratios Metric 1 1 1 0 1 4 00 1 2 00 1 1 41 1 1 22 1 1 15 1 0 86 1 0 81 1 0 70 1 0 50 1 0 25 Inch 1 1 1 0 1 4 00 1 2 00 1 1 29 1 1 21 1 0 78 1 0 64 1 0 50 1 0 25 At 100 magnification in copy mode 30 cpm copier A3 11 x 17 20 copies min B4 81 2 x 14 20 copies min A4 11 x 81 2 30 copies min A4R 81 2 x 11 22 copies min B5 30 copies min B5R 18 copies min 40 cpm copier A3 11 x 17 23 copies min B4 81 2 x 14 23 copies min A4 11 x 81 2 40 copies min A4R 81 2 x 11 27 copies min B5 40 copies min B5R 22 copies min 50 cpm copier A3 11 x 17 26 copies min B4 81 2 x 14 26 copies min A4 11 x 81 2 50 copies min A4R 81 2 x 11 31 copies min B5 50 copies min B5R 24 copies min From 3 9 s A4 11 x 81 2 30 cpm copier F
369. tput across YC13 A17 on the main PCB right after the upper drawer is installed If not replace the main PCB 6 The lower lift motor does not operate C1020 Broken lower lift motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the lower lift motor Poor contact in the lower lift motor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective main PCB Check if 24 V DC is output across YC13 B7 on the main PCB right after the lower drawer is installed If not replace the main PCB 7 The scanner motor does not operate Broken scanner motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the scanner motor Poor contact in the scan ner motor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable 8 Cooling fan motor 1 does not operate Broken cooling fan motor 1 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace cooling fan motor 1 Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 1 connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none repair or replace the cable 9 Cooling fan motor 2 does not operate Broken cooling fan motor 2 coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace cooling fa
370. type of paper that is loaded in drawers No 1 through No 4 1 Select one of the Paper type settings 1st drawer cassette through 4th drawer cassette and then press the Change key 2 Press the key that corresponds to the type of paper Note The setting for drawer No 3 and No 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed Sets where finished copies will be ejected This setting is only available when the optional finisher built in finisher or job separator is installed in the copier 1 Select Select Copy output mode and then press the Change key 2 Select the desired location Fax eject location Custom paper type for 2 sided copying Sets whether or not each custom type of paper custom 1 custom 8 will be available for use in 2 sided copying 1 Select Select paper type 2sided and then press the Change 7 key 2 Select one of the custom paper type settings Custom 1 through Custom 8 and then press the On Off key to change the setting 1 4 6 Sets where incoming faxes will be ejected This setting is only available when the optional fax kit and finisher or the built in finisher or job Separator are installed in the copier 1 Select Select FAX output mode and then press the Change key 2 Select the desired location Default operation mode Sets whether the display that appears after power is turne
371. uide 2 Eject roller 3 Eject pulley LO Switchback roller Switchback pulley 6 Eject switch ESW Feedshift switch FSSW Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Figure 2 1 26 Eject and switchback sections LO lt e o gt YC16 A1 YC16 A2 YC16 B11 YC16 B14 YC16 A11 Re CH D Figure 2 1 27 Eject and switchback sections block diagram 2 1 22 2FD 2FF 2FG Secondary paper feed end EM a Fwd rotation Rev rotation Fwd rotation Ce 50 ms gt 50 ms RSW ESW FSSW Timing chart 2 1 7 Eject and switchback sections operation The leading edge of paper front face turns on the eject switch ESW and at the same time the eject motor EM starts forward rotation b 40 ms after passing of the trailing edge of paper turns off the eject switch ESW the eject motor EM turns off for 50 ms and then starts reverse rotation The leading edge of paper reverse face turns on the eject switch ESW and at the same time the eject motor EM turns off for 50 ms and then starts forward rotation d 309 ms after passing of the trailing edge of the paper turns off the eject switch ESW the eject motor EM turns off 2 1 23 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 1 9 Duplex section The duplex section consists of the components shown in figure In duplex mode after copying on to the reverse face of the paper the p
372. uide rail and attach the rail retainer to the guide rail Make sure that the plate spring of the rail retainer fits into the groove and the edge of the guide rail fits between the pulleys on the reverse side of the rail retainer Guide rail Rail retainer Y spring Figure 1 3 49 1 3 24 When the switchback unit is not to be installed 14 Orient the guide rail such that its pulley is positioned toward the copier and then fit a caster rail to each side of the rail retainer When the switchback unit is to be installed 15 Attach a spacer to each end of the rail retainer using two M4 x 6 binding screws for each 16 Orient the guide rail such that its pulley is positioned toward the copier and then fit the caster rails to the spacer Caster rail Rail retainer Guide rail 17 Secure the rail retainer to the copier using two M4 x 10 binding screws such that the front and rear gaps between the floor and rail retainer are approximately 10 mm 2FD 2FF 2FG E Es 5 E I E Gr Rail retainer Pulley 4 I L d M4x6 SX arf binding screws Ss Caster rail SQ Spacer Z Guide rail Caster rail Spacer Figure 1 3 50 Rail retainer Rail retainer Mx 10 Z binding screws Uf Figure 1 3 51 1 3 25 2FD 2FF 2FG 18 Slightly lift the bottom of the finisher and insert the rail fixing plate into the finisher and then join them by inserting two M4 x 6 binding screws
373. ulated by the doctor blade the developing result is affected by the position of the poles on the magnet roller and the position of the doctor blade A developing bias voltage generated by the high voltage transformer PCB HVTPCB is applied to the developing roller to provide image contrast Doctor blade 90 1 88 Developing roller m m A Distance between the doctor blade and developing roller 0 23 to 0 35 mm Figure 2 1 15 Forming a magnetic brush TNFSOL 2 d V S2 N1 870 x 10 4T N2 420 x 10 4T 81 700 x 104T 82 910 x 10 4T TNS SIG OOL HVTPCB Figure 2 1 16 Developing section block diagram 2 1 13 2FD 2FF 2FG 2 Computing the absolute humidity The humidity sensor HUMSENS converts the relative humidity detected by the humidity sensing element into a voltage and sends it to the main PCB MPCB The main PCB MPCB computes the absolute humidity based on this HUMSENS signal and the temperature ETTH signal detected by the external temperature thermistor ETTH HUMPCB YC16 B10 Humidity YC16 B9 sensing element HUMSENS Figure 2 1 17 Absolute humidity computation block diagram 2 1 14 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 Single component developing system This machine uses the single component developing system and reversal processing is performed with a charged drum a Si and a
374. urn on This problem occurs four times continuously During copying the upper lift limit Switch does not turn on within 200 ms of the upper lift motor turning on At this time removal and insertion of the drawer is prompted Even after removal and insertion of the drawer the upper lift limit switch does not turn on This problem occurs four times continuously Broken gears or couplings of the upper lift motor Replace the upper lift motor Defective upper lift motor Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the upper lift motor Poor contact of the upper lift mo tor connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Defective upper lift limit switch Check if YC13 B9 on the main PCB goes low when the upper lift limit switch is turned off If not replace the upper lift limit switch Poor contact of the upper lift limit Switch connector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for con tinuity within the connector cable If none repair or replace the cable Lower lift motor problem When the lower drawer is inserted the lower lift limit switch does not turn on within 6 s of the lower lift motor turning on and the lower lift limit Switch does not turn on in a retry operation after turning off the lower lift motor for 200 ms At this time removal and insertion of the drawer is
375. ursor down key Is the scanner leading edge registration correct Setting range initial setting ADJUST DATA 32 32 5 ADJUST DATA2 20 20 10 Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0 17 mm Press the stop clear key to exit maintenance mode 1 6 29 2FD 2FF 2FG 3 0 11 Adjusting the scanner center line Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original U034 U072 P 1 6 12 Meer P 1 4 27 Caution Before making the following adjustment ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode Procedure Enter maintenance mode Enter 067 using the numeric keys m Press the start key NENNEN NEN Select the item to be adjusted M Scanner center line aug Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 6 57 ADJUST DATA Scanner axis adjustment data ADJUST DATA2 Scanner axis adjustment data for rotate copying Press the interrupt key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Is the scanner center line correct Press the stop clear key to exit maintenance mode End 1 6 30 Press the start key The new setting is stored For copy example 1 decrease the value using the cursor up key For copy example 2 increase the value using the cursor down key Setting r
376. verse unit Ground Mailbox reverse unit connection signal RESET signal for mailbox reverse unit Serial signal for large paper deck paper feeder Ground Serial signal from large paper deck paper feeder Ground FSW on off signal from large paper deck paper feeder RESET signal for large paper deck paper feeder Connected to the 3000 sheet finisher or booklet stitcher o JO O Q N eck eo RXD o MES 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse Serial signal Ground Serial signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Connected to the 3000 sheet finisher or booklet stitcher Optional 2 3 8 N RESET SET SIG 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC RESET signal 3000 sheet finisher booklet stitcher connection signal Connector Pin No Signal Voltage 2FD 2FF 2FG Description YC6 Connected to the BYPPWSW BYPPSW BYPPFCL BYPFCL FRCSW CFM3 and BYPPLSW BYPPWSWO BYPPWSW1 BYPPWSW2 BYPPFCL 24V BYPFCL 5V TDDSW GND OFS GND FRCSW GND CFMS 24V GND 5V BYPPLSW GND O 00000 0o xe 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC BYPPWSW paper width detection signal BYPPWSW paper width detection signal BYPPWSW paper width detection signal Ground 5 V DC supply for BYPPSW BYPPSW ON
377. with a dry cloth Replace Replace Registration guide Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Maintenance part location Optical section Slit glass Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with a dry cloth Contact glass Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth Mirror 1 Clean User call Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Mirror 2 and mirror 3 User call Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image User call Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Reflector Clean User call Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Exposure lamp Clean or replace User call Replace if an image problem occurs Optical rail Grease User call Check noise and shifting and then apply scanner rail grease PG671 Original size detection Clean User call Clean the sensor emitter and sensor receiver with alcohol or a dry cloth only if there is a problem Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions 9 Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs 2 4 16 Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle 2FD 2FF 2FG Points and cautions Transfer separation section Section Transfer roller unit Maintenance part location Replace Method 400K 30 500K
378. wo screws securing the retainer move the retainer as necessary to adjust and then retighten the screws If holes are off center toward the front of the copier case a in illustration Move the retainer toward the rear of the machine in the direction of the m in the illustration If holes are off center toward the rear of the copier case b in illustration Move the retainer toward the rear of the machine in the direction of the gt in the illustration Retainer O C A a a Figure 1 3 169 Adjust the paper curl 1 Run paper through the machine 2 Check the curl on the paper ejected onto the finisher s auxiliary tray N N P c d Figure 1 3 170 1 3 69 2FD 2FF 2FG If excessive downward curl case c in illustration 1 Open the document finisher s front cover 2 Move the lower lever one step to the left Note The lever is initially set to position 1 and can be adjusted to five positions 1 to D 3 Run paper through the machine 4 Check the downward curl on the ejected paper 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until there is no curl 6 Close the finisher s front cover If excessive upward curl case d in illustration 1 Loosen the four screws and remove the finisher s upper cover 2 Move the upper lever one step to the right Note The lever is
379. x screw M3 x 05 05 Insert the projection of the frame into the hole of the metal hook to position the hook Arrange the cable to position it under the metal fittings Oblong hole Projection Figure 1 3 93 1 3 41 2FD 2FF 2FG 12 Remove a screw turn the metal fittings upward and fit the screw again to the lower hole 13 Insert the intermediate tray and connect the connector white of the intermediate tray to the transfer unit Connect the connectors gray to the connectors of the copier as shown in the illustration Connect the gray connector with more pins to the upper connector and the gray connector with less pins to the lower connector 14 Attach the intermediate tray to the copier as shown in the illustration so that the right and left pins of the intermediate tray are positioned to the recessed portions of the copier and the transfer unit EZ Metal fittings Screw s 9 Screw Figure 1 3 94 Ir Connector white Intermediate tray Figure 1 3 95 Recessed portion Pin oi 1 3 42 Transfer Recessed porton Intermediate tray DOR T Figure 1 3 96 15 Attach the large ejection cover using the two screws that have secured the upper left cover 16 Open the front cover and the conveying cover 17 Attach the staple cover Tighten th
380. y The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2 Select the item to be set and press the start key The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description 3000 FINISHER Adjustment of the amount of slack in the paper in punch mode SADDLE FINISHER Adjustment of the booklet stapling position INNER FINISHER Side registration cursor stop position Setting the amount of slack in the paper 1 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Description Setting range Initial setting Amount of slack in the paper 15 to 15 0 If the position of punch holes varies increase the setting to make the amount of slack larger If paper jams or is Z folded frequently decrease the setting to make the amount of slack smaller 2 Press the start key The value is set 3 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Setting the booklet stapling position 1 Select the size to be set The selected item is displayed in reverse 2 Change the setting using the cursor up down keys Change in value per step A4R LTR Adjustment of booklet stapling 125 to 125 0 0 25 mm position for A4R LTR size B4R Adjustment of booklet stapling 125 to 125 0 0 25 mm position for B4R size AS3R LDR Adjustment of booklet stapling 125 to 125 0 25 mm position for ASR LDR size Display Description Setting range Initial setting 1 4 49 2FD 2FF
381. y to check the status If the on status of a switch is detected the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse Display Switches SET SW Original set switch OSSW FEED SW Original feed switch OFSW REV SW Original switchback switch OSBSW TMG SW DP timing switch DPTSW SZASW Original size length switch OSLSW 2 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key 1 4 47 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No U244 Method for the volume switch 1 Move the original insertion guides to check the detection status of the original size width switch The detected original width is displayed as a numerical value with the decimals omitted Description Numerical Original width to be detected value 51 2 x 81 2 49 664 En HS 50 176 Za 61 440 61 952 103 936 81 2 x 14 81 2 x 11 104 448 Folio A4R 139 264 ea E 139 776 146 432 146 994 197 120 11 x 17 CF 11 x 15 11 x 15 11 x 81 2 197 632 197 720 223 232 s emn 256 For example if any value between 105 and 139 is displayed when the original insertion guides are adjusted for A4R paper it indicates that the original width is detected correctly 2 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop clear key Completion Press the stop clear key at the screen for selecting an item The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed
382. ying 3 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 4 55 2FD 2FF 2FG Maintenance item No Description U260 Changing the copy count timing Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters Purpose To be set according to user copy service provider request If a paper jam occurs frequently in the finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper ejection copies are provided without copy counts The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying To prevent this the copy timing should be made earlier Ifa paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those sections copying is charged without a copy being made To prevent this the copy timing should be made later Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the copy count timing The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description FEED When secondary paper feed starts EJECT When the paper is ejected Initial setting EJECT 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed
383. ys clears and changes the maintenance count Purpose To check the maintenance count Also to clear the count during maintenance service Method Press the start key The maintenance count is displayed Clearing 1 Press the reset key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting 1 Enter a seven digit count using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination Purpose To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020 in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Select the destination The selected item is displayed in reverse Display Description JAPAN METRIC Metric Japan specifications INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric Asia Pacific specifications 2 Press the start key The setting is set and the machine automatically retu

2FG Cover(E) - Moro Informatica

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents